JP2019202180A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a gaming machine capable of improving amusement of games. SOLUTION: A situation occurs in which a small hit game is continuously executed two or more times, and when the first effect sound is output in the first small hit game among them, the second and subsequent small hit games are output. As long as two or more small hit holdings continue at the start of, the second effect sound is output in each small hit game. For this reason, for the player, when the first effect sound is output at the same time as the execution (start) of the small hit game, the second effect sound is output each time the small hit game is executed, whereby the small hit game is output. It is possible to recognize that the situation in which is continuously executed (small hit continuous period) continues (addition to small hit continuous period). As a result, it is possible to enhance the entertainment effect and the interest of the game by continuously executing the small hitting game a plurality of times. [Selection diagram] Fig. 67

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine, and is particularly applicable to a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  Conventionally, when a game ball enters the starting port, a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. As a result of the variable display, if the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the big hit game is executed and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine in which a small hit game is executed is known. A small hit game is a game in which the number of game balls that can be acquired is smaller than a big hit game, and a game that realizes a game property that uses this small hit game to increase the number of possessed balls has been proposed (for example, patents). Reference 1).

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-202405

  However, there is still room for improvement with regard to gaming machines having a gaming property that uses a small hit game to increase the number of balls, in order to improve the gaming interest.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to improve the gaming interest of a gaming machine having such gaming characteristics.

  In order to solve the above-described problems, the present invention employs the following configuration.

That is, the gaming machine of means 1 is
Correct / incorrect determination execution means capable of executing correct / incorrect determination;
First special game execution means capable of executing a first special game based on the result of the determination of success or failure being a first specific result;
A second special game execution means capable of executing a second special game based on the result of the determination of success or failure being a second specific result;
Production execution means capable of performing the production,
The first special game is a game in which a predetermined amount of game profit can be given to the player,
The second special game is a game that can give a player a smaller amount of game profit than the first special game,
The gist of the effect execution means is that a predetermined effect can be executed when the second special game is continuously executed a plurality of times.

  According to such a gaming machine, when a second special game that can give a player a smaller amount of game profit than the first special game is continuously executed a plurality of times, a predetermined effect can be executed. It becomes. Thereby, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the continuous execution of the second special game a plurality of times through the predetermined effect, and as a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. The predetermined effect can be constituted by an effect appealing to the player's vision, an effect appealing to the player's hearing, an effect combining them, or the like.

The gaming machine of means 2 is the gaming machine of means 1 described above,
The effect execution means is characterized in that, when the second special game is continuously executed a plurality of times, the predetermined effect can be executed for each second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the second special game is continuously executed a plurality of times, the predetermined effect can be executed each time the second special game is executed. As a result, the number of executions (number of appearances) of the predetermined effect increases, and it is possible to enhance the effect and interest by executing the second special game continuously a plurality of times.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine of means 1 or 2 described above,
The effect execution means can change the effect mode of the predetermined effect by increasing the number of times of execution of the second special game that is continuously executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, when a predetermined effect is executed at the time of continuous execution of the second special game a plurality of times, the effect mode of the predetermined effect changes as the number of times of execution of the second special game increases. It will be possible. Thereby, it becomes possible to improve the preference of a predetermined effect.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine of any one of the means 1 to 3 described above.
Provided with a game state control means capable of controlling the game state,
The gaming state control means may control a gaming state to a non-specific gaming state and a specific gaming state.
The specific game state is a game state in which the execution frequency of the second special game is higher than the non-specific game state,
The effect execution means can execute the predetermined effect in the specific gaming state.
This is the gist.

  According to such a gaming machine, there are a case where the gaming state of the gaming machine is controlled to a non-specific gaming state and a case where the gaming state is controlled to a specific gaming state. The execution frequency of the second special game is higher than in the case of being controlled to the non-specific game state. For this reason, in the specific game state, the second special game is likely to be continuously executed a plurality of times. By making it possible to execute a predetermined effect in such a specific game state, it becomes easier to execute the predetermined effect in the specific game state, and it is possible to increase the chance that the player contacts the predetermined effect. This makes it possible to enhance the interest of the specific game state.

The gaming machine of means 5 is the gaming machine of any one of means 1 to 4 described above,
An acquisition information storage means capable of storing acquisition information acquired based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
The success / failure determination execution means can execute the determination of the success / failure based on the acquired information.
When it is determined in the determination as to whether the acquired information is predetermined first information, the determination result is the first specific result,
When the second special game is continuously executed a plurality of times, the effect executing means is configured to store the predetermined information when the acquired information determined to be the first information is stored in the acquired information storage means. The gist is that the production may not be performed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the acquisition information storage unit capable of storing the acquisition information acquired based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is provided, and the determination of validity is performed based on the acquisition information. Then, when it is determined that the acquired information is the predetermined first information in the determination of success / failure, the result of the determination of success / failure becomes the first specific result, and based on this, the first special game can be executed. Under these circumstances, when the second special game is continuously executed a plurality of times, acquisition information (acquisition information that triggers the execution of the first special game) that is determined to be the first information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit. If it is, the predetermined effect may not be executed. For this reason, when the predetermined effect is not executed even though the second special game is continuously executed a plurality of times, acquisition information that triggers the execution of the first special game can be stored accordingly. It is possible to indicate to the player that there is a possibility that the first special game is feasible. Thereby, when the second special game is continuously executed a plurality of times, it becomes possible to suggest the subsequent game development by not executing the predetermined effect, and it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the predetermined effect is executed. Become.

  According to the present invention as described above, it is possible to improve the gaming interest.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a back view of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the Example of this invention. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view of the main display device shown in FIG. 3, and is a view showing display devices provided in the gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the game machine. It is a table | surface which shows a response | compatibility etc. with the classification of winning and the opening pattern of a big prize opening. It is a table | surface which shows the various random numbers which the microcomputer for game control acquires. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a jackpot type determination table, (C) is a reach determination table, (D) is a normal symbol per determination table, and (E) is a normal symbol variation. It is a pattern selection table. It is a table | surface which shows a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of an interruption process. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of starting entrance. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol success / failure determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol random number shift process. It is a flowchart of the process during normal symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol confirmation process. It is a flowchart of a normal electric accessory process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 1 standby process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 success / failure determination processing. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 1 changing process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 1 confirmation process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 2 standby process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of special figure 2 determination processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 2 changing process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 2 confirmation process. It is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game). It is a flowchart of a big hit game start process. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of the special figure operation status setting process 1. It is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game). It is a flowchart of the special figure operation status setting process 2. It is a flowchart of the number of reserved balls. It is a flowchart of a power-off monitoring process. It is a flowchart of a sub control main process. It is a flowchart of a reception interruption process. It is a flowchart of a 2 ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart of a 10 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of a change production start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the effect design game effect of the state A which concerns on Example 2. FIG. 12 is a table showing an example of a chance eye effect production pattern (chance eye effect pattern) according to Example 2; It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the chance eye effect of the state A which concerns on Example 2. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of character selection processing according to the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the character selection screen and resident character determination screen which concern on Example 2, (a) is a character selection screen, (b) is a resident character determination screen. 12 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a display screen configuration in a state B according to Embodiment 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition of the production | presentation hold display of the state B which concerns on Example 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the effect design game effect of the state B which concerns on Example 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the reservation notice effect of the state B which concerns on Example 2. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of a hold notice effect process according to the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a hold notice effect determination table according to the second embodiment, where (a) is a decision table for jackpot reservation, and (b) is a determination table for release hold. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the chance eye effect of the state B which concerns on Example 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the effect symbol game effect of the state C which concerns on Example 2. FIG. It is a flowchart of the small hits continuous production related process which concerns on Example 2. FIG. It is a table | surface which shows the transition example of a game when the small hits continuous production is performed in the state C which concerns on Example 2. FIG.

  Next, embodiments of the present invention will be described using examples. In the following, a pachinko gaming machine capable of executing a winning game that can give a predetermined amount of gaming profit (for example, a prize ball) to a player when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed in accordance with the end of the variable display of the symbol. An example to which the present invention is applied will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 attached in the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming board 2 is a gaming machine. It is configured to be detachable from the frame 50. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the gaming board 2 is removed from the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 to which the gaming board 2 and the like are attached, and an outer frame 53 for attaching the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the island facility of the hall. ing. The outer frame 53 is fixed to the island facility, and the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are attached to the outer frame via upper and lower frame hinges 56, 56. Further, the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are pivotally supported on one side end side (left side in FIG. 1) in the vertical direction, and can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 53 with the one side end side as an axis. It is configured. Further, from the closed state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, only the front frame 51 can be opened (opened), or both the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 can be opened (opened).

  In addition, the front frame 51 can supply a launching handle 60 for launching a game ball with a launch intensity corresponding to the operation amount (rotation angle) of the player and a game ball stored and stored to the launching device side. A ball hitting tray (upper pan) 61 and a surplus ball tray (lower pan) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the ball hitting tray 61 are provided. Also, the front frame 51 includes a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b that allow a player to perform a predetermined input while performing a game effect that is executed as the game progresses. (These two effect buttons are collectively referred to simply as “effect button 63” or “input means”). The plurality of effect buttons can be used properly according to the type of game effect. The configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the aspect of the first embodiment, and any input detection means (for example, the player directly touches the button portion to input) can be used as long as the input from the player can be detected. Or non-contact type input detection means (such as a photoelectric type) that detects and inputs that a part of the player's body is close Good.

  The front frame 51 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and image display devices (second image display device 71 and third image display device 72). Also, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are located in front of the front frame 51 (player side) so that the player can easily see the display screens 71a and 72a. It is installed in a slanted shape in the outward direction so as to protrude toward the outside. Further, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are similar to the image display device 7 described later, depending on the execution / non-execution of the game, the game situation, the game effect to be executed, etc. Game production (characters, production designs, etc.), demonstration production, information related to the game (acquired game information, number of rounds, number of consecutive games, remaining period of game state, game mode, reliability / explanation of game production), Information related to the setting of the gaming machine (volume setting information, luminance setting information, etc.) is displayed. In addition, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may display different information and may display the same information. Further, the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display the same information as when different information is displayed. There is a case to do. Further, the same information is displayed on any two of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72, and the remaining one is different information. May be displayed. It should be noted that any one or all of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 may be simply referred to as “image display device”.

  The image display device 7 is provided in an inner region of the game area 3 formed on the game board 2, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided in an outer region of the game area 3. ing. As shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 (provided at the non-open side end) is attached to the front frame 51 via a second image display device hinge 75 (hinge portion). It has been. For this reason, the upper and lower second image display device hinges 75 can be pivoted in the left-right direction. More specifically, it is configured to be able to turn a predetermined angle (about 45 degrees) in the right direction from the state shown in FIG. 1 (normal state). This is because, when the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are opened with the upper and lower frame hinges 56 and 56 as axes, the second image display device 71 provided to protrude forward of the front frame 51 This is a configuration for preventing damage to the hall equipment (ball lending machine, inter-station equipment, etc.) provided adjacent to the frame hinge 56 side (left side of FIG. 1) of the gaming machine 1. . On the other hand, the third image display device 72 (provided at the open end) is fixedly provided to the front frame 51 and cannot rotate.

  In the game board 2, a game area 3 in which a game ball launched by the operation of the launch handle 60 flows down is surrounded by the rail member 4. The game board 2 is provided with a decorative board surface lamp 5. In the game area 3, a plurality of game nails 16 for guiding a game ball are projected. Further, a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, and it is possible to prevent the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launching device side.

  Further, an image display device 7 composed of a liquid crystal display device is provided near the center of the game area 3. The image display device 7 is attached to the game board 2 from the back side of the game board 2. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (also simply referred to as “effect symbols”) are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, also referred to as an effect symbol display area 7b (also referred to as “effect symbol display section”). ), And the design symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R correspond to the gaming state according to the gaming state (low probability low base state, high probability low base state, low probability high base state, high probability high base state). The variable display is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol described later) set as the main player of the game. The effect symbol 8L is also referred to as “left symbol”, the effect symbol 8C is also referred to as “middle symbol”, and the effect symbol 8R is also referred to as “right symbol”.

The display mode of the effect symbol display area 7b shown in FIG. 3 shows one scene when the gaming state is in a normal state (a low-probability low-base state described later, state A). As will be described in detail later, in this low probability low base state, the frequency of game balls entering the start port (second start port 21) is set lower than in the high base state, and whether or not a special symbol is appropriate The determination probability (first special symbol success / failure determination and second special symbol success / failure determination) is low (also referred to as “predetermined probability”), and the variation time of the second special symbol is longer than the variation time of the first special symbol. (2 times or more) is set (all deviations are 10 minutes). Therefore, in a normal state, the second special symbol is variably displayed by firing a game ball in the right game area 3B (second game area) and entering the start hole (second start port 21 or third start port 26). It is more advantageous for the player to play a game in which the first special symbol is variably displayed by firing a game ball in the left game area 3A (first game area) and entering the first start port 20 Has been. In other words, in the normal state, it can be said that the game state is variably displayed mainly by the first special symbol (effect symbol). For this reason, in the normal state (state A), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the effect symbol display area 7b are displayed in a variable manner and stopped in synchronization with the first special symbol.

  Further, each of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of a plurality of symbols (identification information) representing numbers “1” to “9”, for example. Depending on the display mode (stop display mode) of the left, middle, and right effect symbols that are stopped and displayed (derived display) in the effect symbol display area 7b, a first special symbol display 41a ("first") described later (see FIG. 4). The result of the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the “special symbol display unit”) and the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as “second special symbol display unit”). The result of symbol change display (result of special symbol success / failure determination) is displayed (notified) so that the player can easily recognize it. It should be noted that any one (or all) of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the effect symbol may be simply referred to as “symbol” or “identification information”. Further, the special symbol success / failure determination is also simply referred to as “win / failure determination” or “first success / failure determination”. In addition, the control unit (main control unit 80) that performs the special symbol success / failure determination is also referred to as “a / failure determination execution unit” or “first determination / failure determination execution unit”.

  For example, when the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit (also referred to as “first specific hit” or “first specific result”), the same three-digit symbol (such as “777”) (“double eyes”) (“ The production symbol is stopped and displayed at the “hit symbol”. In addition, when a small hit (also referred to as “second specified hit” or “second specified result”), a preset chance symbol such as “135” or a small hit dedicated symbol such as “3 * 3” The effect symbol is stopped and displayed at (also referred to as “small hit symbol”). In addition, when a small hit is made, the symbols in the same mode may be stopped and displayed for the small hits symbol and the off symbol instead of the mode for displaying the small hits dedicated symbol. In addition, when there are a plurality of small hits (first small hit, second small hit, etc.) as small hits, different small hit symbols (first small hit symbol, second small hit symbol, etc.) can be distinguished from each other. ) May be stopped and the same (common) small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed so that it is difficult to distinguish them.

  Also, if the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is unacceptable, at least one of the three symbols such as “637” and “373” is stopped and displayed with a different symbol design (“out symbol” ”). Thereby, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game (the result of the special symbol success / failure determination) by viewing the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed. That is, the player generally does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol success / failure determination by looking at the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, Grasp the effect symbol 8 displayed in the symbol display area 7b. In addition, as an execution mode of the effect symbol variation display, for example, a mode in which scroll display is performed in the up and down, left and right, diagonal directions, a mode in which the effect display is performed using only the first effect symbol display unit 7b, and the first effect symbol display unit. In addition to 7b, there is a mode of effect display using one or both of the second effect symbol display unit 71a (display screen 71a) and the third effect symbol display unit 72a (display screen 72a). Moreover, in addition to this, you may have the aspect which produces an effect display only using the 2nd effect symbol display part 71a or the 3rd effect symbol display part 72a.

  Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying the game effect (effect pattern game effect) using the effect symbols as described above, the game is executed in accordance with the winning game (big hit game, small hit game). A hit game effect (a big hit game effect, a small hit game effect), a demonstration for waiting for a customer, and the like are displayed. In the effect symbol game effect, the hit game effect, and the demonstration effect, in addition to effect symbols such as numbers, effect images other than effect symbols such as background images and character images are also displayed. Although details will be described later, a game state (state A, state B or state C), a state in which a game ball is fired in the left game area 3A, or a game ball is fired in the right game area 3B. The display mode on the effect symbol display area 7b differs depending on whether or not a game is being performed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment is a gaming machine capable of variably displaying both the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel (simultaneously). Such a type of game The machine is also called “simultaneous variable machine”.

  The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) for displaying a first effect hold 9a according to the number of first special figure hold to be described later. There is a second effect hold display area 9d (second effect hold display section) for displaying the second effect hold 9b in accordance with the number of second special figure hold to be described later. The first special figure hold displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, depending on the display mode (the number of displays) of the first effect hold 9a or the second effect hold 9b in the effect hold display area. And the stored number of the second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b can be easily shown to the player. Note that the display position of the first effect hold display unit and the display position of the second effect hold display unit may change depending on the game state, the game mode, or the game effect to be executed (reach effect or the like). Further, only one of the first effect hold display unit and the second effect hold display unit is displayed (for example, only the effect hold display unit corresponding to the special symbol (effect symbol) that is the main depending on the gaming state). It may be.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a center decoration body 10 is provided in the vicinity of the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 so as to surround the effect symbol display area 7b. A stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which a game ball can roll is provided below the center decorative body 10. A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left portion of the center decorative body 10. The warp unit 12 is provided with a warp inlet and a warp outlet. The warp flowing down the game area 3 is received from the warp inlet, and the game ball is discharged from the warp outlet and guided to the stage unit 11. The game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage unit 11 can enter the first start port 20 described later with a higher possibility than the game ball not guided to the stage unit 11. Further, on the upper part of the center decorative body 10, there is an electric decoration member (board surface lamp 5) such as an LED, which can be turned on according to the gaming state, and a decoration member 13 that is shaped like a character or a figure is arranged. Yes.

  In addition, a movable decorative member 14 that is operable in accordance with a game effect is provided at the upper part of the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13. In FIG. 3, only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible. For example, the movable decorative member 14 falls downward (predetermined with the execution of a game effect having a relatively high possibility of winning). The movable decorative member 14 covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of the movable decorative member 14 is visible. As a result, the player enhances the gaming interest and increases the expectation of winning.

  Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, a fixed winning device 19 having a non-variable first start port 20 that does not change the ease of entering a game ball is provided. A random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is obtained based on a game ball entering the first starting port 20, and if a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is established, whether or not the first special symbol is determined ( The first special symbol determination / first determination is performed, the first special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the determination result after a predetermined time.

  Above the right area (right game area 3B) of the center ornament 10 in the game area 3, a gate 28 (a normal start opening, a passing opening, an entrance, a specific start, etc.) through which a game ball can pass (can enter) (Also called mouth). A game ball entering from the upstream side of the gate 28 passes through the gate 28 and flows down in the game area 3 in the downstream direction. The gate 28 also serves as a start gate 29 (also referred to as a combination gate or an operation gate) for starting a big hit game. That is, this gate is the gate 28 and the start gate 29. When a game ball enters (passes) the gate 28, the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28 a, a normal symbol success / failure determination random number or the like is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (fluctuation condition) is established, The symbol symbol determination (also referred to as “normal symbol determination” or “third symbol determination”) is performed, and the normal symbol starts to be changed. After a predetermined time, the normal symbol is determined based on the result of the normal symbol determination. Stop display. When the winning ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed, the movable member 23 is operated (opening operation), and the second starting port 21 is opened. In addition, a control unit (main control unit 80) that performs normal symbol determination as to whether or not the movable member 23 is operated (opening operation) to open the second start port 21 is referred to as “correction determination execution unit” or “ It is also referred to as “third correctness determination execution means”. The gate sensor 28a also serves as a start gate sensor 29a for starting a big hit game. In other words, the sensors that detect the entry into the gate are the gate sensor 28a and the start gate sensor 29a.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, when the gate 28 (start gate 29) is passed, the function as the start gate 29 is exhibited when the conditions for executing the big hit game are satisfied ("big hit" Only “executable state” and “hit waiting state”). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29) when the condition (waiting state for big hit) is not satisfied, the control process for the normal symbol is performed, and the big hit start process is not executed. If the game ball passes through the start gate 29 (gate 28) when the condition is satisfied (in the big hit waiting state), the waiting big hit game is started and a predetermined big prize opening ( A round game in which the first grand prize opening 30) is in an open state (a state in which a player can enter a ball) is started.

  The game area 3 is a right area (right game area 3B) of the center ornament 10 and a game area below (downstream) the gate 28 (start gate 29) is provided with a first big prize opening 30. A big winning device 31 (also referred to as “first variable entrance”) is provided. The first grand prize winning device 31 includes an opening / closing member 32 and opens / closes the first grand prize winning opening 30 by the operation of the opening / closing member 32. The opening / closing member 32 is a game ball passage having a substantially rectangular shape (long plate shape) on the top surface. When the opening / closing member 32 is closed, the entrance of the first big prize opening 30 is closed and the game ball is placed on the top surface of the opening / closing member 32. It is possible to pass. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 is formed in an inclined shape from the upstream side to the downstream side (from the left side to the right side in the drawing). Thereby, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the first grand prize opening 30 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 without entering the first big prize opening 30. And then flow downward in the gaming area.

  Further, the opening / closing member 32 is driven by a first big prize opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 32 is retracted toward the back surface of the game board 3 to thereby form an upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 forming the game ball passage. Disappears. Thereby, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the first grand prize opening 30 enters the first big prize opening 30. As described above, the opening / closing member 32 that opens and closes the entrance of the first big prize opening 30 is a retractable opening / closing member, and when it is in the open state (when opened), the game balls that have flowed down are smoothly drawn into the first large opening / closing member. While entering the winning opening 30, the game ball that has flowed down in the closed state (when closed) can be guided in an arbitrary direction (second starting port 21 described later) by the inclined upper surface passage. It becomes possible. Note that the first grand prize opening 30 can enter a game ball only when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state. In other words, the first grand prize winning device 31 (first variable entrance) is opened and closed by the opening / closing member 32 so that the game ball cannot enter (closed state) and the game ball can enter. It is possible to change to a ball ready state (open state).

  In the game area 3, the right area (right game area 3 </ b> B) of the center ornament 10, and the game area below (downstream) the first big winning opening 30 does not change the ease of entering a game ball. A second fixed winning device 25 having a variable third start port 26 is provided. A random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is obtained based on the game ball entering the third start port 26, and if a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is established, whether or not the second special symbol is determined ( The second special symbol determination and second determination determination) are executed, the second special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the determination result after a predetermined time. The game ball passage is branched below (downstream) from the first grand prize winning opening 30 (upper and lower stages), the upper game ball passage where the third start opening 26 is provided, the second start opening 31 and the second start opening 31 A lower-stage game ball passage in which two major winning openings 35 are provided is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the game ball guided to the upper game ball passage enters the third start port 26 by contacting the game nail 16 provided in the vicinity of the third start port 26, for example. Alternatively, it flows downstream without entering the third starting port 26 and flows into the out port 34. In addition, since the third start opening 26 is a fixed winning device (entrance entrance) that can always enter the ball, it becomes a big hit in the left-handed game (so-called first hit), and the first big hit game is hit right. When the game is executed in a game, it is possible to place the game ball in the third start opening 26 during the big hit game (hold) and execute the variable display of the second special symbol immediately after the big hit game ends.

  In the game area 3, the right area (right game area 3 </ b> B) of the center decorative body 10, and the game area below (downstream) the first big winning opening 30, a variable in which the ease of entering a game ball changes. A variable winning device 22 (also referred to as “variable starter” or “variable starter”) having a second starter 21 of the type is provided. A random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is obtained based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, and if a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is established, whether or not the first special symbol is determined (first 1 special symbol success / failure determination) is executed, the first special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the determination of success / failure after a predetermined time.

  The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23 (also referred to as “opening / closing member”), and opens and closes the second start port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. By this opening / closing operation, the second start port 21 can be changed from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (open state) in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first mode. is there. In the first embodiment, the second starting port 21 allows the game ball to enter only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and prevents the game ball from entering when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. Yes. The second starting port 21 is completely open when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, as long as the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when the movable member 23 is in the open state. It may not be impossible to enter the ball.

  Similarly to the opening / closing member 32, the movable member 23 is a gaming ball passage whose upper surface is substantially rectangular (long plate shape). In the closed state, the movable member 23 closes the inlet of the second starting port 21 and A game ball can pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23. As shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the movable member 23 is formed in an inclined shape from the upstream side to the downstream side (from the right side to the left side in the drawing). Thereby, when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down to the inlet portion of the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 without entering the second starting port 21, It flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

  In addition, the movable member 23 is driven by a second start port solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5), and the movable member 23 is retracted in the back direction of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The movable member 23 disappears from the entrance of the second start port 21. Thereby, when the movable member 23 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the inlet portion of the second start port 21 enters the second start port 21. Thus, the movable member 23 that opens and closes the entrance of the second starting port 21 is a retractable opening and closing member similar to the opening and closing member 32, and the game ball that has flowed down in the open state (when opened) The ball smoothly enters the second starting port 21 and flows down in the closed state (when closed) to allow the game ball to flow in an arbitrary direction (a second large winning port 35 to be described later) by an inclined upper surface passage. To guide.

  Thus, in a state where a game ball is launched into the right region (right game region 3B) and a game is played, when the game ball enters the second start port 21, the first special symbol success / failure determination is executed. When the first special symbol is variably displayed and the game ball enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol determination is executed and the second special symbol is variably displayed. Therefore, in a state where a game ball is fired in the right region (right game region 3B) and a game is played (right-handed game), a game state (state B: low probability) in which the game is mainly performed with the variable display of the first special symbol. A base state, a high-accuracy high-base state) and a game state (state C: high-accuracy low-base state) in which a game is played mainly based on the variable display of the second special symbol.

  Further, in the game area 3, which is the right area (right game area 3 </ b> B) of the center decorative body 10, the game area below (downstream) the second start port 21 is provided with a second big prize opening 35. A big winning device 36 (also referred to as “second variable entrance”) is provided. The second grand prize winning device 36 includes an opening / closing member 37, and opens / closes the second big prize winning opening 35 by the operation of the opening / closing member 37. Like the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37 is a game ball passage having a substantially rectangular shape (long plate shape) on its upper surface. In the closed state, the opening / closing member 37 closes the entrance of the second grand prize winning opening 35 and opens / closes the opening / closing member 37. A game ball can pass through the upper surface of the member 37. As shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 is formed to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from the right side to the left side of the drawing). Thereby, when the opening / closing member 37 is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the second grand prize opening 35 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 without entering the second big prize opening 35. And then flow downward in the gaming area.

  Further, the opening / closing member 37 is driven by a second big prize opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 37 is retracted in the back direction of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The open / close member 37 that has been removed disappears from the entrance of the second big prize opening 35. Thereby, when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the second grand prize opening 35 enters the second big prize opening 35. In this way, the opening / closing member 37 that opens and closes the entrance of the second grand prize winning opening 35 is a retractable opening / closing member similar to the opening / closing member 32, and the game ball that has flowed down in the open state (when opened). Is smoothly entered into the second grand prize winning opening 35, and in the closed state (when closed), the game ball that has flowed down is guided in an arbitrary direction (out opening 34) by the inclined upper surface passage. It becomes possible. Note that the second big winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state. In other words, the second big prize winning device 36 (second variable entrance) is configured to open and close the open / close member 37 so that the game ball cannot enter and the game ball cannot enter. It is possible to change to a ball ready state (open state).

  Further, in the game area below the left area (left game area 3A) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3, a plurality (three) of general entrances 27 are provided. In this way, the game area 3 in which various entrances are arranged is divided into a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side from the center in the left-right direction, and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. , Can be divided into The hitting method in which the game ball is fired so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is referred to as left strike, and the strike method in which the game ball is fired in the right game area 3B so as to flow down is referred to as right strike. . In this pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal state (low probability low base state, state A) at the start of the game is aimed at entering the first starting port 20 by left-handed. In other words, the normal state at the start of the game is a left-handed game mainly composed of a left-handed ball entering the first starting port 20 (first special symbol success / failure determination).

  On the other hand, if a big hit is made in the win determination (first special symbol win determination) based on entering the first starting port 20, the big hit game and after the big hit game (special game) are finished (low high accuracy base state, high accuracy) In the high base state or the high accuracy low base state), entering the gate 28, the first big winning opening 30, the second starting opening 21, the third starting opening 26, or the second big winning opening 35 by right-handed. A game aimed at the ball. Specifically, when a big hit is made in the left-handed game, first, a big-hit standby state is entered, and a right-handed game aiming at entering the gate 28 is obtained. Next, when the player enters the gate 28 (start gate 29) in the big hit waiting state, the big hit game starts, and the right hit game is aimed mainly at the first big winning opening 30.

  When the big hit game is finished and the game state after the big hit game is the low probability high base state or the high probability high base state (state B), mainly to the gate 28 (normal gate) and the second start port 21. It is a right-handed game that aims to enter. On the other hand, when the big hit game is finished and the gaming state after the big hit game is in the high probability low base state (state C), the right-handed game aiming to enter the third starting opening 26 and the second big winning opening 35 Become. In other words, the low-accuracy base state and the high-accuracy base state (state B) are right-handed games mainly consisting of entering the second starting port 21 by right-handed (first special symbol success / failure determination). The low base state (state C) is a right-handed game whose main subject is a ball entering the third starting port 26 (second special symbol determination). Thereby, even if it is the same right-handed game, the main starting port (target of special symbol success / failure determination) differs depending on the game state (state B or state C).

  In the right game area 3B (second game area), a second out port 34b is provided on the upstream side of the gate 28, and the game balls flowing into the game area downstream of the gate 28 in the right game area 3B The amount is adjustable (can be reduced). That is, the second out port 34b is installed upstream of all the entrances installed in the right game area 3B, and the game nails provided in the vicinity of the second out port 34b are used to It is possible to adjust the rate of entry (ingress rate) of game balls into the installation area. Further, in the right game area 3B (second game area), the third out port 34c is located downstream of the second starting port 21 and upstream of the second big winning port 35 which is a big winning port for small hits. Is provided. By this third out port 34c, the rate of entry of game balls into the game area on the side of the second big winning port 35 when a small hit occurs, that is, the rate of entering the second big winning port 35 during the small hit game. Adjustable. A game nail provided in the vicinity of the third out port 34c can adjust the rate of entry of the game ball (entry rate) into the second big prize port 35.

  When a game ball enters the first starting port 20, the second starting port 21, the first major winning port 30, the second major winning port 35, and the general winning port 27, the respective starting ports A predetermined number of game balls (also called “prize balls” or “game profit”) are paid out (given). In this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out (the amount of game profit) based on the entrance to the first big prize opening 30 is the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entrance to the second big prize opening 35. Set more than the number (amount of gaming profit). Specifically, the first grand prize opening 30 pays out 15 prize balls for one entry, and the second big prize opening 35 has 10 pieces for one entry. The prize ball is to be paid out.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is disposed at the lower right portion of the game board 2. The main display 40 has a first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit) that displays the first special symbol in a variable manner and stops, and a second special symbol display that displays the second special symbol in a variable manner and stopped. 41b (second special symbol display unit) and a normal symbol display unit 42 (normal symbol display unit) that displays the normal symbol (also referred to as “specific identification information”) in a variable manner and stops display. In addition, the main indicator 40 includes a first special figure hold indicator 43a for displaying the number of stored decision determination information (first special figure hold) related to the first special symbol, and the determination information (second display) related to the second special symbol. 2nd special figure hold display 43b for displaying the number of stored 2 special figure hold), and a general figure hold display 44 for displaying the number of stored operation (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42 is included. ing.

  Further, the main display 40 has a hit indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination or the second special symbol success / failure determination has been won, the first special symbol success / failure determination or the second special symbol success / failure determination. When the result is a win, the round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the winning game to be executed, the game status indicator 46 indicating that the probability variation function is activated, and the shooting direction of the game ball, that is, the right A firing direction indicator 47 is included to indicate whether it should be hit or left. The main indicator 40 includes a variation state indicator 49 that indicates the variation state (c1) of the first special symbol, the variation state (c2) of the second special symbol, and the variation state (c3) of the normal symbol. Yes. Various displays included in the main display 40 are display-controlled by a main controller described later.

  The variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the game ball entering the first start port 20 or the second start port 21. The variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on the game ball entering the third start port 26. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. The first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display unit 41. In addition, the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b may be collectively referred to as a special figure hold display unit 43.

  In the special symbol display unit 41, the special symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time, then stopped and displayed. The special symbol (stop symbol) that is stopped (derived) is used to display the first start port 20 and the second start port. 21 or the result of the determination on the basis of the ball entering the third starting port 26 (special symbol determination on determination, jackpot lottery) is notified. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of special symbols based on the special symbol success / failure determination. When the stop symbol is a predetermined special symbol (specific identification information) (that is, when it is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol), the release pattern corresponding to the type of the specific special symbol that is stopped is displayed. A special game (a big hit game, a small hit game) for opening the first big prize opening 30 or the second big prize opening 35 is performed. In addition, the opening pattern of the special prize opening (the first big prize opening 30 and / or the second big prize opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41 a is configured by eight LEDs indicated by “i to p”, and a special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is displayed. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is 15R first big hit, the three LEDs “ijn” are turned on and the rest are turned off. When the 4R second big hit is reached, the four LEDs “jnkl” are turned on and the rest are turned off. In addition, in the case of detachment, the two “lo” LEDs can be turned on and the rest can be turned off. The second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by “a to h”, and displays a special symbol corresponding to the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination. About the stop display mode, similarly to the first special symbol display device 41b, different display modes are set according to the result (big hit, small hit, miss) of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment. In addition, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed (before derivation display), the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined fluctuation time. The variation display mode is, for example, in a predetermined order from left to right. It can be set as the aspect which each LED lights so that light may flow repeatedly.

  Thus, each of the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b is composed of a plurality of LEDs (display units), and the first special symbol display 41a is displayed during the variation display of the first special symbol. When a plurality of LEDs corresponding to 1 are turned on (flashing) in a predetermined order and the variation time elapses, the first special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is determined as a jackpot type (one mode if one type). ), A small hit type (one mode if one type) and a stop type (one mode if one type) are stopped and displayed.

  The variation state indicator 49 includes a display unit c1 (LEDc1), a display unit c2 (LEDc2), and a display unit c3 (LEDc3). The display unit c1 indicates the variation state of the first special symbol, and the display unit The variation state of the second special symbol is indicated by c2, and the variation state of the normal symbol is indicated by the display unit c3. Specifically, the display part c1 which shows the fluctuation state of the first special symbol is composed of one LED (display part) which is a smaller number of LEDs (display part, indicator) than the first special symbol indicator 41a. Has been. Then, the first special symbol is displayed in a blinking manner during the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed, the display is stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the result of the first special symbol determination. Specifically, in the case of losing, the stop display is made by turning off the light, and in the case of big hit, the stop display is made by lighting all red regardless of the type of the big hit. When the change display of the first special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped), it is stopped and displayed in yellow.

  Accordingly, the display section c1 is blinked during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, is lit yellow when the fluctuation display is interrupted, is lit red when the big hit symbol is stopped, and the off symbol is stopped. Is turned off (not displayed). As a result, by viewing the display unit c1 of the variation state indicator 49, it is possible to grasp the variation state of the first special symbol (during variation, interruption, stop, determination result). Moreover, since the fluctuation state display device 49 has a simpler configuration (the number of display devices is smaller) than the first special symbol display device 41a, it is difficult to grasp the jackpot type and the like in detail. Can be easily grasped. Moreover, the fluctuation state display device 49 (display unit c1) functions as the second first special symbol display device 41a. “Interruption of fluctuation display” is a process that can be performed when the result of the determination of whether or not the other special symbol (second special symbol) to be executed at the same time is a big hit. Then, after the release condition is satisfied, the variable display is restarted.

  Moreover, the display part c2 which shows the fluctuation | variation state of a 2nd special symbol is one LED (display part, indicator) which is fewer LED than the 2nd special symbol display 41b similarly to the display part c1. Display section). Then, during the variation display of the second special symbol, it blinks, and when the variation time of the second special symbol elapses, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination. Specifically, when it is off, it is stopped and displayed by turning off the light. When it is a big hit, it is stopped and displayed with all red lights regardless of the big hit type. When it is a small hit, all lights are green regardless of the small hit type (small hit mode). Press to stop display. When the change display of the second special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped), it is stopped and displayed in yellow.

  Accordingly, the display part c2 is blinked during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, is lit yellow when the variation display is interrupted, is lit red when the big hit symbol is stopped, and the small hit symbol is stopped. The inside is displayed in green, and is off (not displayed) while the off symbol is stopped. As a result, by viewing the display part c2 of the variation state indicator 49, it is possible to grasp the variation state of the second special symbol (during variation, interruption, stop, determination result). Moreover, since the fluctuation state display device 49 has a simpler configuration (the number of display devices is smaller) than the second special symbol display device 41b, it is difficult to grasp the jackpot type and the like in detail. Can be easily grasped. Moreover, the fluctuation state display device 49 (display unit c2) functions as a second second special symbol display device 41b.

  In addition, the display mode (symbol) displayed on the display unit c1 of the fluctuation state indicator 49 is also referred to as “first state symbol” or “first sub-symbol”. Further, since the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination can be confirmed from the stop mode of the display unit c1, it is also referred to as “first confirmation symbol (also simply referred to as“ confirmation symbol ”)”. The display mode (symbol) displayed on the display unit c2 is also referred to as “second state symbol” or “second sub-symbol”. Moreover, since the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination can be confirmed from the stop mode of the display unit c2, it is also referred to as “second confirmation symbol (also simply referred to as“ confirmation symbol ”)”. In addition, the first state symbol corresponds to the variation display and stop display of the first special symbol, and the second state symbol corresponds to the variation display and stop display of the second special symbol. Display fluctuation and stop. Therefore, if the result of the special symbol success / failure determination of the first special symbol is out, the first state symbol is stopped and displayed by turning off (disappearing mode), and in the case of a big hit, all red lights (regardless of the big hit type) Press to stop display. The relationship between the second special symbol and the second state symbol is the same.

  Moreover, the display part c3 which shows the fluctuation state of a normal symbol is 1 LED (display part) which is fewer LEDs (display part, indicator) than the normal symbol display 42 similarly to the display part c1. It is configured. During normal symbol variation display, it blinks, and when the regular symbol variation time has elapsed, it is stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the result of the normal symbol success / failure determination. Specifically, in the case of losing, the stop display is performed by turning off the light. In addition, when the change display of the normal symbol is interrupted (paused), it is stopped and displayed in yellow.

  Accordingly, the display unit c3 is blinked during normal symbol variation display, is lit yellow when the variation display is interrupted, is lit red when the symbol symbol is stopped, and is extinguished when the off symbol symbol is stopped. (Hidden). Thus, by viewing the display part c3 of the fluctuation state indicator 49, it becomes possible to grasp the fluctuation state of the normal symbol (fluctuating, interrupting, stopping, whether or not it is determined whether or not it is correct). In addition, since the fluctuation state indicator 49 has a simpler configuration (the number of indicators) is smaller than that of the normal symbol indicator 42, it is difficult to grasp the hit type and the like in detail, but the fluctuation state is easy. It becomes possible to grasp.

  In addition, the display mode (symbol) displayed on the display part c3 of the fluctuation state indicator 49 is also referred to as “first state normal symbol” or “first sub-normal symbol”. In addition, the first state normal symbol is subjected to variable display and stop display corresponding to the normal symbol variable display and stop display. Accordingly, when the result of the determination of whether or not the normal symbol is determined to be off, the display is stopped with a light extinction (disappearance mode).

  In this embodiment, a special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) and a fluctuation state indicator 49 are provided, and the fluctuation state of the special symbol can be grasped by any of them. When any LED of the special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) having a large number of LEDs that can grasp the fluctuation state in detail fails (breakage, disconnection, etc.) However, it is possible to grasp the approximate fluctuation state by the fluctuation state indicator 49. The same applies to the normal symbol display 42 and the fluctuation state display 49. In this embodiment, the main control unit controls display of both the special symbol display (the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b) and the fluctuation state display 49.

  Here, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is a hit (big hit or small hit) among the stop display modes (display result of the variable display) of the special symbol or the effect symbol is referred to as a “hit mode”. ”,“ Specific mode ”,“ specific display mode ”or“ specific display result ”, and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is out of place is“ out of mode ”or“ non-specific mode ” , Also referred to as “non-specific display mode” or “non-specific display result”. In addition, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit is also referred to as “big hit mode” or “big hit symbol”. This is also referred to as “small hit mode” or “small hit pattern”. Furthermore, it refers to any or all of the image display device, the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit), the second special symbol display 41b (second special symbol display unit), and the special symbol display unit 41. Also referred to as “variation display means” or “identification information display means”.

  In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20, the second start port 21, or the third start port 26, various kinds of random numbers for determining whether or not a special symbol is appropriate based on the received ball Information (also referred to as “acquired information”) is acquired, and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special figure storage unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Specifically, if the information is acquired based on the ball entering the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, the first special figure storage is stored as the first special figure reservation (also referred to as “first acquisition information”). If the information is stored in the part 85a and acquired based on the ball entering the third starting port 26, the information is stored in the second special figure reservation storage part 85b as the second special figure reservation (also referred to as “second acquisition information”). Is done. An upper limit is set for the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. The first special figure storage unit 85a and the second special figure storage unit 85b are also referred to as “first acquisition information storage unit” and “second acquisition information storage unit”, respectively, and are also referred to as “acquisition information storage unit”. .

  The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit 85 is digested when it is possible to display a special symbol based on the special figure hold. The digestion of the special symbol hold means that the special symbol determination random number or the like corresponding to the special symbol hold is determined, and the special symbol variable display for indicating the determination result is executed. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the change display of the special symbol based on the game ball entering the first start port 20, the second start port 21 or the third start port 26 cannot be immediately executed at the time of the entrance That is, during the execution of variable display of each special symbol, or during the execution of a special game based on any special symbol success / failure determination, the special symbol success / failure determination with respect to the entry is made up to a predetermined number (4 each) as an upper limit. Can be reserved (reserved).

  The number of special figure hold is displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special figure hold indicator 43a is composed of two LEDs “uv”, and the first special figure is controlled by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special figure hold. The number of holds is displayed. For example, when the number of holds is 0, “u □ v □” (for example, □: unlit, ●: red lit, ▲: green lit) is set so that both LEDs are turned off, and the number of held is 1 In this case, a display mode in which the u LED is turned off and the v LED is turned on in red, such as “u □ v ●”, can be used. Further, when the number of holdings is 2, a display mode in which the u LED is lit in red and the v LED is turned off, such as “u ● v □”. In addition, when the number of holds is 3, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which both LEDs are lit in red, such as “u ● v ●”. Further, when the number of holdings is 4 (upper limit number), both LEDs can be lit in green as “u ▲ v ▲” to make a display mode. The second special figure hold indicator 43b is composed of two LEDs “wx”, and the second special figure hold is controlled by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of second special figure hold. The number is displayed. For example, when the number of holds is 0, the display mode is to turn off both LEDs such as “w □ x □” (for example, □: unlit, ●: red lit, ▲: green lit). 4 is also determined in the same manner as the first special figure holding display 43a.

  The normal symbol variation display is performed based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 (detection by the gate sensor 28a). In the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time, and then the stop symbol is displayed. The result of the normal symbol success / failure determination based on the passing of the game ball to the gate 28 is displayed based on the stopped normal symbol (stop symbol). Inform. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is one normal symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols based on the normal symbol determination. If the stopped normal symbol is a predetermined specific symbol (a normal symbol), an auxiliary game (“specific game”) that opens the second start port 21 in an open pattern according to the current gaming state. Also called). The means (main control unit) for executing the auxiliary game (specific game) is also referred to as auxiliary game execution means (specific game execution means). The opening pattern of the second start port 21 will be described later.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two “st” LEDs, and displays a normal symbol corresponding to the result of the normal symbol success / failure determination according to the lighting mode. It is. For example, if the determination result is a win, the normal symbol that is turned on when both LEDs are lit is stopped and displayed, such as “s t” (for example, ■: lighted, □: lighted off). Further, when the determination result is out of place, an out-of-order normal symbol in a form in which only the LED of t is lit, such as “s □ t ■”, is displayed. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed over a predetermined variation time. The variation display mode is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are alternately turned on and off.

  When there is a game ball passing to the gate 28, the pachinko gaming machine 1 acquires various information (also referred to as “acquisition information”) such as a random number for normal symbol determination based on the passage, and the acquired various information Is temporarily stored as a general map reservation in the general map storage unit 86 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. An upper limit is set for the number of pending map holds that can be stored in the pending map storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. The general map reservation stored in the general map storage unit 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the general map storage becomes possible. The digestion of the general symbol hold means that the normal symbol validity determination random number corresponding to the general symbol hold is determined, and the normal symbol variation display for indicating the determination result is executed. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the normal symbol variation display based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be executed immediately at the time of the passage, that is, during the normal symbol variation display or during the execution of the auxiliary game Can reserve (hold) the right to determine whether or not to accept a normal symbol with respect to the passage of a predetermined number.

  The number of the general map hold is displayed on the general map hold display 44. Specifically, the universal map hold indicator 44 is composed of two “qr” LEDs, and displays the number of universal map holds by turning on the LED according to the number of universal map holds. For example, when the number of hold is 0, “q □ r □” (for example, □: unlit, ●: red lit, ▲: green lit), both LEDs are turned off, and the number of held is 1 In this case, a display mode can be adopted in which the q LED is turned off and the r LED is lit in red, such as “q □ r ●”. Also, the number of holds 2 to 4 is determined in the same manner as the first special figure hold indicator 43a.

  Next, based on FIG.2 and FIG.5, the electrical structure in this pachinko game machine 1 is demonstrated. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment includes a main control board 80 ("main control unit" and "main control unit") that performs control related to gaming profits such as special symbol success / failure determination, normal symbol success / failure determination, and game state transition. (Also referred to as “game control unit”), sub-control board 90 (also referred to as “sub-control unit”, “sub-control unit”, or “effect control unit”) for performing control related to effects executed as the game progresses, game balls A payout control board 110 (also referred to as a “payout control unit”) for performing control related to payout, an effect symbol 8 displayed on the image display device 7, a symbol displayed on the effect indicator 102, a third effect hold indicator 103a, And an image control board 100 (image control unit) that performs display control of the fourth effect hold display 103b and the like. As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case storing a main control board 80 is provided in a substantially central portion on the rear side (back side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and above the main control board case, An image control board storage case storing the audio control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100 is provided, and a sub control board storage case storing the sub control board 90 is provided on the image control board storage case. Is provided. Further, a payout control board case for storing the payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power supply board case for storing the power supply board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

  A game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “game control microcomputer”) 81 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main control board 80. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data (information) to / from other boards via an input / output circuit 87 (I / O port unit). The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81. The ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-described special figure storage unit 85 (the first special figure storage unit 85a and the second special figure storage unit 85b) and the general figure storage unit 86. .

  Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88. Therefore, a signal is input from each sensor to the main control board 80, and a signal is output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors include a first start port sensor 20a, a second start port sensor 21a, a third start port sensor 26a, a gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a), a first big prize port sensor 30a, and a second. A big winning opening sensor 35a and a general winning opening sensor 27a are connected. These various sensors are also referred to as “detecting means”.

  The first start port sensor 20 a is provided in the first start port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21 a is provided in the second start port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 21. The third start port sensor 26 a is provided in the third start port 26 and detects a game ball that has entered the third start port 26. The gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a) is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first grand prize opening sensor 30 a is provided in the first big prize opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first big prize opening 30. The second grand prize opening sensor 35 a is provided in the second big prize opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second big prize opening 35. The general entrance sensor 27 a is provided in each of the general entrances 27 to detect a game ball that has entered the general entrance 27.

  In addition, as the solenoids, a second start opening solenoid 24, a first large winning opening solenoid 33, and a second large winning opening solenoid 38 are connected. The second start port solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22. The first big prize opening solenoid 33 is for driving the opening / closing member 32 of the first big prize winning device 31. The second big prize winning solenoid 38 is for driving the opening / closing member 37 of the second big prize winning device 36. Further, the main control board 80 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special diagram hold indicator 43a, a second special figure hold indicator 43b, A figure hold display 44, a change state display 49, a round display 45, a game state display 46, a firing direction display 47, and a hit display 48 are connected. That is, display control of these main indicators 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81 (main control unit 80).

  The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected to a payout device 120 for paying out a prize ball or a rental ball and a card unit 135, and the launching device 112 via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as a “launch control unit”). Is connected. The firing device 112 includes a firing handle 60 (see FIG. 1). The card unit 135 is installed adjacent to one end side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (usually the left side of FIG. 1), and the inserted prepaid card (game) when the player performs a predetermined ball lending operation. It is possible to lend a ball based on information stored in a value storage medium).

  The payout control board 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as “payout control microcomputer”) that controls the payout of the game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling payout of game balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 controls the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the input / output circuit 117. Drives to pay out prize balls and pays out balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the launch device 112, the touch switch 114 detects the player's contact with the launch handle 60, and the launch volume 115 is the launch handle 60. Detect the amount of rotation. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

  The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional (one-way) communication connection that can only transmit signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (not shown) (for example, a circuit using a diode) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, an effect control one-chip microcomputer 91 (“effect control microcomputer”) that controls the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the sub-control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling a game effect as the game progresses, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. Yes. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. The ROM may be externally attached.

  The sub control board 90 is connected to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. Based on the command received from the main control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 is connected to the CPU (VDP) of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 (“image control microcomputer”) of the image control board 100. Display of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, the third image display device 72, the effect display device 102, the third effect hold display device 103a, and the fourth effect hold display device 103b. Let control take place. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. In the ROM of the image control board 100, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including production symbols, holding symbols, etc.) Image data such as a background image is stored. The CPU (VDP) of the image control board 100 reads the image data from the ROM based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

  The production indicator 102 is made up of two LEDs, one of which displays the change display and the stop display in accordance with the change display and stop display of the first special symbol, and the other LED displays the change display of the second special symbol. In addition, the display mode shows the display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (result of the special symbol success / failure determination) by lighting / extinguishing the corresponding LED or color according to the stop display. Press to stop display. Similarly, the third effect hold indicator 103a and the fourth effect hold indicator 103b are each composed of two LEDs. Then, by turning on / off the two LEDs, or by a combination of colors, the third effect on-hold display 103a is displayed with the number of on-holds displayed in the first effect on-hold display area 9c and the first special figure hold display 43a. Display control is performed in a display mode that indicates the same number of reserved items as the number of reserved items. The fourth effect hold indicator 103b is display-controlled in a display mode that indicates the hold number displayed in the second effect hold display area 9d and the hold number displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b. The

  The character design is displayed on a part or substantially the entire display screen 7a (effect design display portion), or the movable decorative member 14 is operated in front of the display screen 7a (effect design display portion) to display the display screen 7a (effect design display). Part) or a part of the entire effect part 8 may be partially invisible or not visible in the effect design 8, the first effect hold display unit 9c, or the second effect hold display unit 9d. is there. Even in such a covering state, these effect indicators 102, the third effect hold indicator 103a, and so on can be supplementarily so that it is possible to confirm the change display and stop display of the effect symbols, the number of holds, etc. And the 4th production reservation display 103b is provided. Note that the display forms of the effect display device 102, the third effect hold display device 103a, and the fourth effect hold display device 103b are in a state in which visual recognition is not obstructed by the operation of the movable decorative member 14 and the like, and is always visible. It has become. Further, a VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided instead of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

  In addition, the production control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effect, and the like from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may execute voice control. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 and the CPU of the image control board 100 may execute sound control. Further, in this case, acoustic data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91, based on the command received from the main control board 80, emits light pattern data (data for determining lighting / extinction, light emission color, etc.) for determining the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5. , Lamp data) is determined from data stored in the ROM, and lighting control of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is performed via the lamp control board 107.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Note that the movable decorative member 14 is only partially visible in FIG. 1, but is a movable so-called gimmick (movable member) provided in the center decorative body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines operation pattern data (also referred to as “driving data”) for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, The operation of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the determined operation pattern data. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may execute lamp lighting control and operation control of the movable decorative member 14. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and data relating to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

  Further, the sub control board 90 includes a first effect button detection switch 63c and a first effect button detection switch 63c for detecting that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) is operated (pressed, rotated, pulled, etc.). 2 effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Accordingly, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output from the corresponding effect button detection switch to the sub-control board 90.

  Next, a description will be given of the control related to the special symbol success / failure determination in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment. As a result of the special symbol success / failure determination, there are “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out”. In the case of “hit”, the “hit symbol” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. The jackpot symbol (specific display result) is determined in advance according to the type of jackpot described later (see FIG. 6). When “small hit” is selected, the “small hit symbol” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. In addition, when it is “disengaged”, the “designated symbol” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. When it is determined that the game is a big hit or a small win, a “special game” is executed to open the first big prize opening 30 or the second big prize opening 35 with an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the special symbol displayed in a stopped state. . Special games executed as big hits are also called “big hit games” or “first special games”, and special games executed as small hits are also called “small hit games” or “second special games”.

  There are a plurality of types of hits, and the hit type corresponding to the result (specific result) is executed according to the result (specific result) of the special symbol success / failure determination. That is, depending on whether the result of the special symbol success / failure determination result is the first specific result, the second specific result, the third specific result, or another specific result, etc. , Including small hits). In addition, the special game executed may differ depending on the hit type, and the amount of game profits that can be acquired by the special game differs, or the game state after the special game ends. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the types of hits are “15R (round) first big hit”, “4R second big hit”, “4R third big hit”, “4R fourth big hit”, “15R first big hit” "5 big hits", "2R sixth big hit", and "2R seventh big hit". In “15R first big hit” and “15R fifth big hit”, the number of times of opening (number of rounds) of the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30) is 15. In addition, in “4R second big hit”, “4R third big hit”, and “4R fourth big hit”, the number of times of opening (number of rounds) of the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30) is four. In “2R sixth big hit” and “2R seventh big hit”, the number of open times (number of rounds) of the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30) is two. Thus, in the big hit, the first big prize opening 30 is all opened and the second big prize opening 35 is not opened. Therefore, the first big winning opening 30 is also referred to as “big winning big winning opening (big winning variable winning opening)”.

  In addition, “15R first big hit”, “4R second big hit”, “4R third big hit”, “15R fifth big hit”, and “2R sixth big hit” indicate the game state after the end of the big hit game. Then, the state is shifted to a high probability state described later (actual change function is activated). Therefore, these five types of big hits are also called “probable big hits (high probability big hits)”. This high probability state (probability changing function) continues until the next big hit occurs. Further, “4R fourth big hit” and “2R seventh big hit” shift the gaming state after the big hit game to a low probability state described later (the probability changing function is not activated). Therefore, these two types of big hits are also referred to as “low probability big hits (low probability big hits, normal big hits)”.

  In addition, “15R first big hit”, “4R second big hit” and “15R fifth big hit” are “second special symbol short time” which sets the variation time of the second special symbol to a short time after the big hit game ends. "Function" is activated and the high base generation function is not activated. As a result, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game becomes a highly accurate low base state (state C). This highly accurate low base state continues until the next big hit occurs. In this high accuracy low base state, the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol is longer than the low accuracy low base state, low accuracy high base state, and high accuracy high base state. It is set. In particular, the variation time of the first special symbol when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is out of place is set to a long time (see FIG. 9).

  In addition, as will be described in detail later, the playability of the high probability low base state (state C) will be described later. A ball is entered into the mouth 26. Then, it is a period during which it is possible to increase the number of game balls during the period between the previous jackpot and the next jackpot (between the jackpots) by performing the second special symbol win / fail determination. In addition, by frequently hitting the small hits in the high probability low base state between the big hits, it can be expected that a lot of game balls will be acquired in a short time by the small hits. In other words, it is a period that is advantageous for the player and is a period in which the gaming interest can be enhanced.

  In addition, “4R 4th big hit” and “2R 7th big hit” activate the “first special symbol time reduction function” and the “high base generation function” after the big hit game ends. Due to the operation of the first special symbol time shortening function, the variation time (average variation time) of the first special symbol time function is shorter than when the first special symbol time shortening function is not activated (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy low base state). Set to time. Since the second special symbol time shortening function is not activated, the variation time of the second special symbol is set longer than the variation time of the first special symbol. Thereby, the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes a low-accuracy base state. In the case of “4R fourth big hit” and “2R seventh big hit”, the low-accuracy base state ends when the next big hit occurs or when the special symbol variation display is executed 100 times. . When the special symbol variation display is terminated 100 times, the gaming state is set to the low probability low base state (normal state). In addition, as will be described in detail later, in the low-accuracy base state, the right-hand game is performed in the right game area 3B in which various entrances are arranged as described above. This is a period in which a game is played in anticipation of the occurrence of a big hit.

  In addition, “4R third big hit” and “2R sixth big hit” activate the “first special symbol time reduction function” and the “high base generation function” after the big hit game ends. Since the second special symbol time shortening function is not activated, the variation time of the second special symbol is set longer than the variation time of the first special symbol. As a result, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game becomes a highly accurate and high base state. In the case of “4R third big hit” and “2R sixth big hit”, the “first special symbol time reduction function” and the “high base generation function” continue until the next big hit occurs. Further, as described above, the “probability changing function” continues until the next big hit occurs. That is, in the case of “4R third big hit” and “2R sixth big hit”, after the big hit game is finished, the high-accuracy base state (first special symbol short-time state) is set until the next big hit occurs.

  In the high-accuracy base state, as in the low-accuracy base state, by making a right-handed game in the right game area 3B, the first special symbol success / failure determination is performed, and the game is anticipated for the next big hit. As described above, the high probability low base state is a period to be performed. As described above, by performing the second special symbol success / failure determination with the right-handed game, the small hits are frequently generated, so that many game balls can be obtained in a short time by the small hits. This is an advantageous period for players who can expect to win. Note that there are more game balls that can be acquired in the highly accurate and low base state than game balls that can be acquired in the highly accurate and high base state.

  In addition, a highly accurate base state after the big hit game (4R third big hit game) related to “4R third big hit game” and a low level after the big hit game (4R fourth big hit game) related to “4R fourth big hit game” are completed. By executing a common game effect (first game effect: background, game mode, character design, reach effect, etc.) in the certain base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. As shown in FIG. 9, with these gaming states as state B, the variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, both gaming states are set to a non-notifying state in which the gaming state (highly accurate high base state or low probability high base state) is not notified (recognition is difficult).

  When the type of jackpot was “4R 3rd jackpot”, the high-accuracy and high-base state continued even after the special symbol fluctuation display was passed 100 times, resulting in “4R 4th jackpot”. In this case, after the special symbol variation display has passed 100 times, the gaming state becomes a low probability low base state (a normal state disadvantageous to the player). Therefore, in this non-notification state, the player plays a game with the expectation that the highly accurate and high base state will continue even after 100 times have elapsed, and enhances the gaming interest. In the low-accuracy base state or the high-accuracy base state, that is, the high base state, the player does not reduce the number of possessed balls very much (in a state where the decrease rate of the possessed balls is slower than the low-accuracy low base state). It can be performed.

  Similarly, after the end of the big hit game (2R sixth big hit game) related to “2R sixth big hit game” and after the end of the big hit game (2R seventh big hit game) related to “2R seventh big hit game” It is difficult to recognize which game state the player has by executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character design, reach effect, etc.) To do. As shown in FIG. 9, with these gaming states as state B, the variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, both gaming states are set to a non-notifying state in which the gaming state (highly accurate high base state or low probability high base state) is not notified (recognition is difficult).

  When the type of jackpot is “2R sixth jackpot”, even after the special symbol change display has passed 100 times, the high-accuracy and base state has continued, and “2R seventh jackpot” has been reached. In this case, after the special symbol variation display has passed 100 times, the gaming state becomes a low probability low base state (a normal state disadvantageous to the player). Therefore, in this non-notification state, the player plays a game with the expectation that the highly accurate and high base state will continue even after 100 times have elapsed, and enhances the gaming interest.

  Here, the big hits of “4R third big hit”, “4R fourth big hit”, “2R sixth big hit” and “2R seventh big hit”, which are big hits in which the gaming state after the big hit game is set to state B, respectively. The symbol is also referred to as “first specific display result”, and “15R first big hit”, “4R second big hit” and “15R fifth big hit”, which are big hits where the gaming state after the big hit game is set to state C. Each of the jackpot symbols is also referred to as a “second specific display result”.

  In addition, as for the small hits that may occur as a result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination, the number of times of opening the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is six times, and once (and The total (open) time is also set short. Specifically, a total of 1.8 seconds is released with 6 times of 0.3 seconds. Therefore, the number of game balls that can be acquired in one small hit game is set in comparison with the big hit game (for example, 15R first big hit game, 4R fourth big hit game, etc.). However, by generating a small hit a plurality of times (a large number of times) in a highly accurate and low base state between the big hits, a plurality of small hit games can be executed and more game balls can be acquired. Further, in the small hit, all the second big prize opening 35 is opened, and the first big prize opening 30 is not opened. For this reason, the second big winning opening 35 is also referred to as “small winning big winning opening (variable winning opening for small winning)”. Note that, in the small hit (small hit game), unlike the big hit (big hit game), the number of times of opening the big winning opening is not called the number of rounds but simply called the number of times of opening. Also, the probability variation function does not operate based on the occurrence of small hits, and if the gaming state at the time of small hit occurrence is a high probability state, it will be in a high probability state after the small hit game ends, and when a small hit occurs If the game state is a low probability state, the low probability state is set even after the small hit game is over. Similarly, the time reduction function and the high base generation function of the second special symbol are not operated based on the occurrence of the small hit.

  In addition, the probability of allocating to each big hit in the first special symbol (special figure 1) judgment is 20% for 15R first big hit, 10% for 4R second big hit, 35% for 4R third big hit, and 4R first big hit. The 4 big hits are 35%. On the other hand, the big hit in the determination of success / failure of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) is 50% for 15R fifth big hit, 15% for 2R sixth big hit, and 35% for 2R seventh big hit. In other words, if the hit / fail judgment (second special symbol success / failure judgment) based on the ball entering the third start port 26 whose fluctuation frequency has been improved by the operation of the second special symbol short-time function described later, It becomes a big hit (15R fifth big hit), and it becomes possible to acquire a large amount of game balls in a short time. As described above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, rather than being a big hit in a win / fail determination (first special symbol win / fail determination) performed by entering a game ball into the first start port 20 or the second start port 21. It is more likely for the player to win a large number of hits (second special symbol win / no-go determination) when a game ball enters the 3 start opening 26 is more advantageous. It is set to be. In addition, the player plays the game in anticipation of the occurrence of a high-accuracy and low-base state in which the game ball can be increased by the small hit, along with the occurrence of the 15R fifth big hit.

  Here, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or missed is determined based on a “special symbol success / failure determination random number (also referred to as“ correction determination information ”)”, and it is a big hit The determination of the type of jackpot is based on “a random number for determining the jackpot type (also referred to as“ design determining random number ”or“ symbol determining information ”). The result of the first special symbol success / failure determination does not have a small hit. As shown in FIG. 7A, the special symbol success / failure determination random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 629. Of the random numbers for special symbol success / failure determination, a value (big value determination value) that is determined to be a big hit in the special symbol success / failure determination is also referred to as "first information", and a value that is determined to be a small hit ( The “small hit determination value” is also referred to as “second information”, and the value (determination determination value) that is determined to be out is also referred to as “third information”. The jackpot type determination random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. The random numbers (acquisition information) acquired based on the balls entering the first starting port 20, the second starting port 21 or the third starting port 26 include special symbol success / failure determination random numbers and jackpot type determination random numbers. In addition, there is “variation pattern random number (also referred to as“ variation pattern information ”)”. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) including the variation time of the special symbol. The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 198. In addition, the random numbers acquired based on the passage through the gate 28 include the normal symbol success / failure determination random numbers shown in FIG. The normal symbol success / failure determination random number is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second start port 21 (normal symbol success / failure determination). Normal design random numbers take values in the range of 0-240.

  Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, each function of the probability variation function (probability variation function) for the special symbol and the normal symbol, the variation time shortening function for the special symbol and the normal symbol, and the opening extension function of the second start port 21 are in an activated state or not. There are a plurality of gaming states depending on the combination of the operating states. A state in which the probability variation function is activated for the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is referred to as a “high probability state”, and a state in which the probability variation function is not activated is referred to as a “low probability state”. In the high probability state (hit probability: 1/63), the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the special symbol success / failure determination is higher than in the low probability state (hit probability: 1/315). In other words, in the low-probability state, the jackpot determination table for the low-probability state is used to determine whether or not it is hit. The determination is made using the table (see FIG. 8A). That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the probability that the special symbol variation display result is a big hit (the stop symbol becomes a big hit symbol) is higher than when the special symbol probability variation function is not activated. A means (main control unit) for setting a high probability or a low probability as the probability of determining whether or not the special symbol is good (big hit probability) is referred to as “probability setting means”.

  In addition, a state in which the variable time reduction function is activated for the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is referred to as a “time-short state”, and a state in which the function is not activated is referred to as a “non-time-short state”. In the short time state, the average value of the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the variation display to the time of the fixed display) is shorter than the average value of the variation time of the special symbol in the non-short time state. That is, in the short-time state, the variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern table that is determined so that a variation pattern having a short variation time is selected more than in the non-time-short state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the short-time state, the digestion of the special figure hold is accelerated, and effective entry into the starting port (entrance that can be stored as special figure hold) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit with smooth progress of the game.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the length of the variation time of the second special symbol is particularly related to the advantage / disadvantage of the player, it is set as “second special symbol time shortening function” as shown in FIG. Yes. State A (low probability low base state) and state B (low probability high base state) shown in FIG. 9 are the states in which the second special symbol short-time function is not activated, that is, the state mainly based on the first special symbol success / failure determination. , High accuracy and high base state). In the state A (low probability low base state), when the player plays a right-handed game and enters a game ball into the third starting port 26, the second special symbol success / failure determination is executed and the second special symbol is determined. Is displayed fluctuating. However, since the variation time of the second special symbol in the state A is set to a very long time (out of 600 seconds, big hit 110 seconds, small hit 1000 seconds), the game cannot proceed smoothly (such state) (Also referred to as “first condition state”). In addition, since it is a low base state (1st game state), the entrance into the 2nd starting port 21 is a state which is impossible or difficult.

  Therefore, even if a right-handed game is performed in state A, it is difficult for the player to acquire a large amount of game balls. Therefore, in the state A, the game is progressed in the left-handed game aiming at the first start port 20 in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to an appropriate length. On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display simultaneously (in parallel). Even when the second special symbol is erroneously displayed in the state A, the game ball is inserted into the first starting port 20 without waiting for the variable special symbol display to end. The first special symbol can be variably displayed.

  On the other hand, in state B (low-accuracy high-base state, high-accuracy high-base state), a right-handed game is performed because the high-base state (second game state) and the first special symbol time reduction function are operating. Thus, it is possible to enter both the second start port 21 and the third start port 26 that have been opened. In the state B, like the state A, the second special symbol time reduction function is not activated. Therefore, when the ball enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol success / failure determination is executed and the second special symbol is variably displayed. However, the variation time of the second special symbol is very long. Since it is set to (out of 600 seconds, big hit 110 seconds, small hit 1000 seconds), the game cannot proceed smoothly. However, when the ball enters the second starting port 21, the first special symbol success / failure determination is executed and the first special symbol is variably displayed. In addition, the first special symbol time reduction function is set by the operation of the first special symbol time reduction function, and the first special symbol success / failure determination is executed more frequently than in the state A, so that the game can proceed smoothly.

  Further, as a state mainly based on the second special symbol success / failure determination, state C (highly accurate low base state) shown in FIG. 9 is provided. In state C (highly accurate low base state), the second special symbol time reduction function is activated, so it is possible to play a game aiming to enter the third starting port 26 by playing a right-handed game. It becomes. When the ball enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol success / failure determination is executed and the second special symbol is variably displayed. Also, the second special symbol short-time state is set by the operation of the second special symbol short-time function, and the second special symbol success / failure determination is executed more frequently than in the state A and the state B, and the game proceeds smoothly. Can do. Thereby, it is possible to execute the second special symbol success / failure determination which is more advantageous than the first special symbol success / failure determination.

  In the state C, when the ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, the first special symbol determination is executed and the first special symbol is variably displayed. Since the symbol variation time is set to a very long time (out of 600 seconds, big hit 110 seconds), the game cannot proceed smoothly. Therefore, in the state C, even when the first start opening 20 or the second start opening 21 is entered or there is a holding memory related to the first special symbol success / failure determination, it is more than the second special symbol success / failure determination. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the disadvantageous first special symbol success / failure determination is executed as much as possible.

  In this way, both state B and state C are states in which a right-handed game is performed, but in state B, as in state C, the gaming state is performed mainly based on the first special symbol success / failure determination, and state C Then, it is set as the gaming state in which the second special symbol success / failure determination is mainly performed. As a result, in the so-called consecutive game period (right-handed state) after a shift to right-handed game in the normal state (low probability low base state, state A) in which the left-handed game is performed, the first special symbol propriety determination The game state is diversified by transitioning between a game state performed mainly by the game state and a game state performed mainly by the second special symbol success / failure determination. In addition, the game state in which the first special symbol success / failure determination is the main and the game state in which the second special symbol success / failure determination is the main have different types of possible big hits (big hit games). During the game continuation, different big hits (big hit games) are generated by the transition of the game state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from getting bored and to enhance the gaming interest.

  Further, when the second special symbol time reduction function is activated, that is, in the state C shown in FIG. 9 (this state is also referred to as “second condition state”), as shown in FIG. Since the variation time of the special symbol becomes short, the player can play the game smoothly without reducing the number of balls compared to the left-handed game (the second special symbol success / failure determination, the first 2 special symbol variable games) can be executed. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol time-shortening function is not activated during the period in which the second special symbol time-shortening function is activated (the variation time of the first special symbol time-saving function is longer than that in the normal state). However, the first special symbol time reduction function may be activated. Further, it is assumed that the holding ball is maintained or slightly decreased in the state B and increases in the state C.

  The probability variation function and the variation time reduction function (first special symbol time shortening function or second special symbol time shortening function) for the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) operate simultaneously. The probability variation function and the variation time shortening function for the normal symbol are operated in synchronization with the high base generation function. In other words, the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function of the normal symbol operate in a high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), and low base state (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy state). Does not operate in the low base state. Therefore, in the high base state (state B), the hit probability in the normal symbol success / failure determination is higher than that in the low base state (also referred to as a “normal high probability state”). That is, in the high base state (state B), the value of the normal symbol random number (per hit random number) determined to be a winning is larger for the state B than the normal symbol per unit determination table used in the low base state (states A and C). The normal symbol hit / fail determination (ordinary symbol determination) is performed using the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 8C). That is, when the probability variation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the result of the variation display of the ordinary symbol is a hit (the stop symbol becomes a normal symbol) is higher than when the normal symbol display 42 is not activated. .

  In the high base state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the low base state. In the first embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds in the low base state, but 1 second in the high base state (see FIG. 8E). Furthermore, in the high base state, the opening time of the second start port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than that in the low base state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is activated. Specifically, when the result of the normal symbol success / failure determination becomes a hit in the low base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation of 0.9 seconds three times (opening time: 2.7 seconds) to release The second start port is in an open state during the period of operation. Further, when the result of the normal symbol win / reject determination becomes a win in the high base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation for 6.0 seconds once (opening time: 6.0 seconds). . The closing time between opening operations in the low base state is 0.1 seconds. In this embodiment, the number of opening operations of the opening and closing member 37 is different between the low base state and the high base state, but the opening operation number may be the same. For example, the opening operation in the low base state may be opened once for 2.7 seconds, or the opening operation in the high base state may be opened three times for 2.0 seconds. Further, the opening operation in the high base state may be opened 6 times in 1.0 seconds, and may be more than the number of opening times in the low base state. In such a case, it is also said that the function of increasing the number of opening times of the variable winning device 22 is activated.

  In the high base state, the probability variation function, the variation time shortening function, and the open time extension function of the variable winning device 22 are activated in the high base state, compared with the low base state in which these functions are not activated. The period during which the second start port 21 is open becomes longer (the open time per unit time becomes longer), and the frequency of entering the game ball into the second start port 21 is increased (also referred to as “high frequency state”). ). As a result, the execution frequency of the first special symbol success / failure determination increases. As described above, in the high base state, it is possible to aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the hand-held game balls.

  In addition, if the opening time is the same, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball passes through the second starting port 21 when the number of times of opening is small. In the present embodiment, the opening mode of the second start port 21 in the high base state is set to open once for 6.0 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to an extremely short time (1 second). Since the second starting port 21 is closed while the normal symbol is changing, the game ball starts to flow down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 in the closed state because the second starting port 21 is closed. The time is set to such a time that the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 is opened before passing through the upper surface. When the movable member 23 is opened while flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 enters the second starting port 21 in the opened state. In addition, in order to prevent a game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 from passing through the upper surface of the movable member 23, a material constituting the upper surface (game ball passage) of the movable member 23 is used as a game on the front side. The material has a higher coefficient of friction than the material that makes up the ball passage (the material is different).

  Thereby, the game ball flow down speed on the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set to a speed slower than the game rapid flow or the speed of the game ball passage on the front side. In addition, as an aspect for reducing the flow-down speed, the inclination angle may be loosened or an inhibiting member (such as a protrusion) for reducing the flow-down speed may be provided. In addition, thereby, the game ball that has flowed down to the second starting port 21 in the high base state does not enter the second starting port 21 (flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23), and the second big winning port. The possibility of flowing down to 35 is further reduced. In other words, in the high base state, even if the second big prize opening 35 is opened (a state where a ball can be entered) with a small hit, the game ball that has flowed down enters the second start port 21 and the second It is difficult to enter the big prize opening 35. Further, the third out port 34c can also prevent the game ball that has flowed down to the second large winning port 35 from entering the second large winning port 35.

  In the high base state, not all the functions described above may operate. That is, the second starting port is activated by the operation of at least one of the probability variation function, the variation time shortening function, and the open time extension function of the variable winning device 22 for the normal symbol, compared to when the function is not activated. It is only necessary that 21 is easily opened (the frequency of entering the ball is high). Further, the high base state may be independently controlled without accompanying the time-short state of the special symbol. A function that generates such a high base state is referred to as a “high base generation function”.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, since it is more advantageous for the player to determine whether or not the second special symbol is successful than to determine whether or not the first special symbol is correct, the player uses the first special symbol. There is a possibility that the second special symbol may be variably displayed without being variably displayed. That is, even in the normal state (low probability low base state), there is a possibility of trying to play a right-handed game. However, as described above, in the normal state (low probability low base state), the variation time (average variation time) of the second special symbol is extremely long compared to the variation time (average variation time) of the first special symbol. Therefore, even if the second special symbol is variably displayed in the normal state (even if the ball enters the third starting port 26), it cannot be variably displayed many times, and the gaming efficiency is very high. It is bad. That is, it is more advantageous for the player to display the first special symbol variably by left-handed game than to variably display the second special symbol by right-handed game. Here, “the state in which the first special symbol is not playing (non-gaming state)” means that the first special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of holds of the first special symbol is “0”. ". In addition, “the state in which the second special symbol is not playing (non-gaming state)” means that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of holds of the second special symbol is “0”. It means that.

  Further, in the high base state such as the high-accuracy high-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state, the frequency at which the second start port 21 is opened is improved, and the first special symbol time reduction function is used to change the first special symbol variation time. This shortens the time and improves the game efficiency of right-handed games. In such a case, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously if the right-handed game is performed and the first special symbol determination is made, rather than the left-handed game. Further, in the high base state, the second start port 21 is easily opened compared to the low base state, and it is easier to enter the second start port 21 than to enter the first start port 20. Because it is. For this reason, a right-hand strike is made to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 21 while allowing the game ball to pass through the gate 28 which is a trigger for determining whether or not the normal symbol is appropriate.

  Further, in the highly accurate low base state, the second special symbol time-shortening function shortens the second special symbol variation time, and the game efficiency by right-handed gaming is improved. In such a case, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by performing the right-handed game and performing the second special symbol determination that is advantageous to the player. Further, in the high accuracy low base state, the frequency of entering the second start port 21 is the same as in the low accuracy low base state (normal state), and is executed based on the entrance into the second start port 21. The variation time of the first special symbol is changed over a long time (compared to the low probability low base state). In addition, in the high accuracy low base state, the probability variation function, the variation time shortening function, and the open time extension function of the variable winning device 22 are not activated, and therefore, the entrance to the second start port 21 is not performed. The sphere frequency is low compared to the high base state. Therefore, the prize ball based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 cannot be obtained as much as the high base state. However, instead of the second special symbol success / failure determination, the small hits with a high probability (small hit probability: 420/630) prevent the game balls from being reduced during the big hits, but rather make frequent hits. It is also possible to increase the holding ball by generating (multiple times).

  That is, in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), by entering the second start port 21 frequently by right-handed games, the ball enters the second start port 21 The winning of the next big hit is aimed at by the first special symbol success / failure determination without greatly reducing the holding ball. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls based on the entrance to the second start opening 21 is set to one, and even if all the right-handed game balls enter the second start opening 21, The sphere does not increase (is maintained). In the present embodiment, about 75 to 85% of the right-handed game balls are set to enter the second start opening 21, so that the high base is set unless entering the other entrances. If the state is continued for a long period of time, the specification is such that the ball is reduced slightly. Further, by adjusting the game nails around the second out port 34b, it is possible to adjust the entrance rate of the game balls into the second start port 21.

  On the other hand, in the high probability low base state, the right hit game causes a small hit to occur at a high frequency (420/630) by the second special symbol success / failure determination based on the ball entering the third starting port 26, and the high probability While trying to increase the number of balls in the small hit game during the low base state, the second special symbol success / failure determination, which is more advantageous than the first special symbol success / failure determination, aims to generate the next big hit. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment, in the high probability low base state, the longer the period in which the next big hit does not occur (the longer the period of the high probability low base state continues), the more small hits occur. There will be more opportunities (to play a small hit game), which will be advantageous to the player.

[Description of board configuration and game state]
In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, in the right game area 3B (second game area), there are various entrances from the upstream side of the game area to the gate 28 (start gate 29), the first grand prize opening 30, and the second game area. 2. The starting port 21 and the second winning port 35 are arranged in the optimum order. Further, since the game ball flow path in the right game area 3B is formed as shown in FIG. 3, when these winning holes are closed, about 90% of the game balls launched into the right game area 3B are about 90%. , Passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29), then flows down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 of the first big winning opening 30, then flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21, and then flows into the second second winning opening 35. The upper and lower opening / closing members 37 are made to flow down to the out port 34. And if there is an open winning opening in the middle of the flow, it enters the winning opening, is discharged from the winning opening to the back of the game board, and the entered gaming ball is placed in the gaming area downstream from it. It has a composition that does not exist. Further, the remaining 10% not flowing into the gate 28 enters the second out port 34b provided on the upstream side of the gate 28 and is discharged out of the gaming machine. Further, by adjusting the angle of the game nail around the second out port 34b, it is possible to adjust the inflow ratio of the game ball to the gate 28 side.

  By arranging the gate 28 at the most upstream, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball is prevented from reaching the gate 28 by the opened second starting port 21 or the like. Further, it is possible to prevent as much as possible that the normal symbol hold becomes “0” and a waiting time (a state in which the normal symbol does not change) occurs. That is, by arranging the gate 28 in the uppermost stream in the right game area, almost all game balls hit right can be passed through the gate 28 regardless of whether other winning holes are opened. Further, since the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 flows down the right game area as it is, the presence of the gate 28 does not hinder the entry to other winning holes.

  When a right-handed game is performed in a high base state (low-accuracy base state, high-accuracy base state), it is first determined whether or not the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the second start port 21 is opened. Is done. In the high base state, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time (1 second), and the probability per normal symbol is also set to a high probability (239/240), so the game ball is gated. Immediately after passing through (after 1 second), the movable member 23 operates to open the second start port 21. That is, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the normal symbol success / failure determination is executed and the normal symbol is variably displayed, before the game ball that has passed through the gate reaches the entrance of the second starting port 21, 2 The start port 21 is opened. In addition, since the opening time of the second starting port 21 is also opened once for 6.0 seconds, the second starting port 21 is closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second as long as the right-handed game is continued. Then, the cycle of opening once for 6.0 seconds, closing during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second, and then opening once for 6.0 seconds (1 second closing → 6 .. Opening for 0 seconds-> Closing for 1 second-> Opening for about 6.0 seconds->)).

  Therefore, when a right-handed game is performed in a high base state, the second start port 21 is almost open, and most of the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B (about 70 to 80%) are in the second start port 21. You will enter the ball. Further, when the game ball enters the second start port 21, the first special symbol success / failure determination is executed. In the first special symbol success / failure determination, in the highly accurate base state, a big hit is made with a probability of 1/63, and a small hit is not generated, and it comes off with a probability of 62/63.

  First, when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is unsuccessful, most (about 70 to 80%) of the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B pass through the gate 28 and are in the open state. And the other game balls flow downstream from the game ball passage branching before the second start port 21, and flow down to the second start port 21, without flowing down to the third start port 21. 26 enters the ball or flows into the outlet 34. Thereby, the first special symbol success / failure determination is executed continuously (at a high frequency). In addition, since one winning ball is discharged by entering one ball into the second starting port 21, the decrease rate of the holding ball is reduced and the first special symbol success / failure determination is executed, and the next big hit is determined. It becomes possible to aim. In addition, one prize ball is also discharged by entering one ball into the third starting port 26.

  Next, when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit, the first big winning port 30 on the upstream side of the second starting port 21 is opened in a manner corresponding to the big hit type shown in FIG. . Further, the second big prize winning port 35 provided on the downstream side of the second starting port 21 is not opened in the big hit game. As a result, when the big hit game is started, the game ball flowing down by the right-handed game can smoothly enter the first big winning opening without being blocked by other winning openings such as the second starting opening 21. Enter 30. Here, when the second starting port 21 is arranged upstream of the first big winning port 30, the game shifts to the low base state during the big hit game, but in this embodiment, the second starting port 21 is also in the low base state. Since the specifications are such that the game can be opened, a game ball that flows down the right game area during the big hit game has entered the second start port 21 first, and has not entered the second start port 21. Only the player enters the second grand prize opening 30.

  Moreover, since there is only one winning ball based on the ball entering the second starting port 21, the execution time of the big hit game is prolonged for a long time, and the player has no merit. Rather, the game becomes redundant, and does not proceed smoothly, and there is a risk that the game interest will be reduced. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, by arranging the first big winning opening 30 upstream of the second starting opening 21, such a situation can be prevented and the big hit game can proceed smoothly. Become. It should be noted that since the first big winning opening 30 is not opened except during the big hit game, the first big winning opening 30 may also block the entry to the second start opening 21 when not in the big hit game. Absent.

  Next, the highly accurate low base state will be described. The highly accurate low base state is a low base state, but since the variation time of the second special symbol is short, it is advantageous for the player to advance the game with a right hand. When a right-handed game is performed in the highly accurate and low base state, first, a determination is made as to whether or not the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the second starting port 21 is opened (normal symbol determination). In the low base state (highly accurate low base state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a long time (3 seconds) compared to the high base state, and the probability per normal symbol is also low compared to the high base state Since (1/240) is set, after the game ball has passed through the gate, after a short time (after 3 seconds), the movable member 23 operates to open the second start port 21 when it hits. It becomes a state. Since the probability of winning is set to 1/240, it is almost out of place, and there is a low possibility that the second start port 21 will be in the open state. In addition, instead of such a mode, the probability of winning in the normal symbol success / failure determination in the low base state may be set to 0/240, and all may be outliers. If it does in this way, the 2nd starting mouth 21 will not be in an open state in a low base state. Similarly, the hit probability in the high base state is 239/240.

  That is, in the highly accurate and low base state, the probability that the second start port 21 is in the open state is set to be very low, so that the game ball that has flowed down to the second start port 21 entrance becomes the second start port 21. The possibility of entering the ball is low, and the possibility of reaching the entrance of the second big prize opening 35 through the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set high. In addition, the possibility that the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination will be a small hit is different in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state) or in the high accuracy low base state. Absent. That is, the small hit probability does not change regardless of the gaming state (small hit probability: 420/630). Further, the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination has no small hit, and the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination has a small hit.

  The game balls flowing down the first big prize opening 30 through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 are branched into the third start port 26 side passage and the second start port 21 side passage by the branch portion. When the game ball that has flowed into the third starting port 26 side passage enters the third starting port 26, a second special symbol determination is performed. Further, in the highly accurate low base state, even if the game ball passes through the gate 28, it is unlikely that the second start port 21 will be in the open state. All flows down to the second big winning port 35 and the third out port 34 c provided downstream of the second starting port 21 without entering the second starting port 21.

  In addition, when the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination executed based on entering the third starting port 26 is a small hit, the second big winning port 35 on the downstream side of the second starting port 21 is 6 is opened in the opening / closing mode for small hits shown in FIG. Specifically, the opening operation of 0.3 seconds is executed 6 times (the closing time between the opening operations is 0.1 seconds, and the total opening time is 1.8 seconds). Then, the game ball that has flowed into the second starting port 21 side passage passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 in the closed state and flows down to the second big winning port 35 and is opened by the small hit game. Enter the second big prize opening 35.

  The prize balls based on the entrance to the second grand prize opening 35 are 10 prize balls for each entry, and therefore enter the second big prize opening 35 during the small hit game. As a result, it is possible to increase the holding ball during the highly accurate low base state. In addition, since the high-accuracy low base state continues at least until the next big hit is generated by the special symbol success / failure determination, the player may increase the ball as the high-accuracy low base state continues for a long period of time. It becomes possible. In the high-accuracy and high-base state, the second special symbol short-time state and the first special symbol variation time are set to a long time (first special symbol long-time state). Is higher than the execution frequency of the first special symbol success / failure determination. In the present embodiment, on average, about 20 prize balls (two entered balls) can be obtained by generating one small hit game. By generating this small hit game a plurality of times (multiple times) until the next big hit occurs, it is possible to increase a large number of game balls (for example, 200 in ten times). Also, as a total winning ball of the “renso” period in which the right-handed game is continued, in addition to the winning ball of the big hit game, the acquired ball of the small hit game can be added, and a larger amount of gaming balls can be acquired. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the gaming interest.

  Further, the second big winning port 35 arranged downstream of the gate 28, the first big winning port 30 for big hit (dedicated to big hit) and the second starting port 21 (the most downstream of these) is for small hit ( It is considered as a big prize opening. In addition, the second large winning opening 35, which is a small winning large winning opening, is arranged downstream of the second starting opening 21, so that the opening of the second starting opening 21 (opening / closing control) causes a second large winning opening. The number (ratio) of game balls reaching the winning opening 35 can be controlled. Specifically, when the small hit game is executed by the opening / closing control of the second start port 21 (the time to be in the open state, the variation time of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol determination), the high base state ( The possibility of a game ball entering the second large winning opening 35 is higher in the high-accuracy and low-base state than in the low-accuracy and high-base state). Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, by forming a flow path that does not reach the second large winning opening 35 unless it passes through the second starting port 21 (without entering the ball), 2 The effect of opening / closing control of the start port 21 is made more effective.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the second start port 21 is configured to be in an almost open state in a low-accuracy and high-base state in which a small hit game can be generated (a configuration in which the second start port 21 is not open at all) is possible. It is difficult to adjust the rate of entering the second big winning opening 35 when a game is generated by entering the second starting port 21. In view of this, by providing a third out port 34c between the second start port 21 and the second major winning port 35, and making it possible to adjust the rate of entering the third out port 34c, the second major winning unit is achieved. The entrance rate to the mouth 35 can be adjusted.

  In addition, even if it is the same right-handed game, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 21 and the ball is almost maintained (including slight increase or decrease) (or the rate of decrease of the ball is suppressed). However, a state where a game is played in the expectation that the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination will be a big hit (an advantageous big hit) (a high base state), and a game ball is inserted into the third start port 26 to reduce the size. When the winning occurs, the player enters the second big winning opening 35 to increase the holding ball, and expects that the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination will be a big hit (advantageous big win) (high probability low Base state), and diversify gameplay. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the gaming interest. It should be noted that for the player, the gaming state is more advantageous in the high-accuracy and low-base state where the number of balls can be increased than in the high-base state. In addition, while continuing the right-handed game, it is possible to shift between the high base state (low-accuracy high-base state or high-accuracy high-base state) and the high-accuracy low base state. Diversify and enhance the entertainment amusement.

  In addition, the start gate 29 is also used as the gate 28, and is provided at the most upstream in the right game area 3B. As a result, when the big hit waiting state is established, the second starting port 21 or the like does not block the passage to the start gate 29, and allows the game ball to pass through the start gate 29 at an arbitrary timing to start the big hit game. It becomes possible to do. The start gate 29 and the gate 28 may be provided separately. In this case, the start gate 29 may be upstream or downstream of the gate 28. It is necessary to provide upstream from the 2 start port 21, the 3rd start port 26, and the second big prize opening 35.

  In addition, when a right-handed game is to be performed, the firing direction indicator 47 is controlled to be lit in a predetermined manner to notify that the game should be fired to the right game area. Further, when the left game is to be played, the firing direction indicator 47 is turned on (display controlled) in a predetermined manner to notify that the left game area should be fired. Specifically, the firing direction indicator 47 is composed of two “yz” LEDs, and indicates the firing direction by lighting the LEDs according to the gaming state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that it should be fired to the left game area as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as “y □ z □” (for example, □: off, ■: on). it can. Further, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that it should be fired to the right game area as a display mode in which both LEDs are lit such as “y ■ z ■” (for example, □: extinguished, ■: lit). it can.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the gaming state when the variation display of the identification information (special symbol, production symbol) is performed is “low probability low base state”, “high probability low base state”, “ It is possible to control either “low accuracy high base state” or “high accuracy high base state”. Of these, the low accuracy low base state is also called “normal gaming state”, and the high accuracy low base state is It is also called “specific game state”. In addition, a gaming state other than the high probability low base state (any or all of the low probability low base state, the low probability high base state, and the high probability high base state) is also referred to as a “non-specific gaming state”.

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (control processing by the main control unit) will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the counter, flag, status, buffer, and the like that appear in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads and executes the main control main process program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80. . As shown in FIG. 10, in the main control main process, initial setting is first performed (S101). In the initial setting, for example, stack setting, constant setting, interrupt time setting, CPU setting of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) setting, various flags, status and counter Perform a reset. The initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, the initial value of the status is “1”, and the initial value of the counter is “0”. The initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter. In the examples and drawings, the normal symbol is “normal”, the special symbol is “special”, the first special symbol is “special 1” or “first special”, and the second special symbol is “special”. 2 ”and“ second special drawing ”.

  Following the initial setting (S101), interrupts are prohibited (S102), and the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103), the value of the various random number counters shown in FIG. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0” or may be changed randomly. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

  When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is completed, the interruption is permitted (S104). While the interrupt is permitted, the interrupt process (S105) can be executed. This interrupt process (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80, for example, at a cycle of 4 msec. Then, after the interrupt process (S105) is completed and before the next interrupt process (S105) is started, the update process of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is repeated. Executed. When an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU in the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt process (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, the interrupt process (S105) will be described with reference to FIG. In the interrupt process (S105), an output process (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), commands (control signals) set in an output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below are output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, and the like. To do. The command and the like output here include information regarding the gaming state, special symbol success / failure determination, symbol as a jackpot type, variation pattern, and the like. The command is composed of, for example, 2-byte information. The upper 1 byte is information regarding the type of command, and the lower 1 byte is information regarding the content of the command.

  In the input process (S202) performed after the output process (S201), various sensors (a first start port sensor 20a, a second start port sensor 21a, a third start port sensor 26a) that are mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1. The detection signals detected by the first grand prize opening sensor 30a, the second big prize opening sensor 35a, the general ball opening sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5) are read and stored as prize ball information in the output buffer of the RAM. Further, a detection signal from a lower plate full switch for detecting the fullness of the extra ball receiving tray 62 (also referred to as “lower plate”) is also fetched and stored in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as lower plate full data.

  Next, normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S203) is executed. The normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203) is the same process as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update processing of various random number counter values (including normal symbol random number counter values) shown in FIG. 7 includes the execution period of the timer interrupt process (S105) and other periods (after the end of the interrupt process (S105), The period until the next interrupt process (S105) is started). Thereby, randomness is given to the acquired values of various random numbers.

  Following the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S203), the starting port sensor detection processing (S204), the starting ball entry processing (S205), the ordinary drawing operation processing (S206), and the special figure 1 operation processing (S207) described later. ), Special figure 2 operation processing (S208), reserved ball number processing (S209), and power-off monitoring processing (S210). Thereafter, other various processes (S211) are executed, and the interrupt process (S105) is terminated. Then, until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (main control unit), the processes of S102 to S104 of the main control main process are repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10), and the interrupt pulse is input. Then (after about 4 msec), the interrupt process (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the command set in the RAM output buffer in the previous interrupt process (S105) is output.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
Next, the start port sensor detection process (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. In the start port sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), then the number of normal symbol holding balls (the number of normal symbol holding balls, specifically, the counter for counting the number of holding the general symbol holding in the RAM) It is determined whether or not (value) is 4 or more (S302). On the other hand, if it is determined in S301 that the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

  If it is determined in S302 that the number of normal symbol reserved balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of normal symbol reserved balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), “1” is added to the number of stored normal symbol reserved balls (S303), and the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed. And proceed to S305. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value of the random symbol counter for normal symbol determination (label-TRND-H, FIG. 7B) stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired. Then, the obtained random number value (acquired information, ordinary figure obtaining information) is stored in an address space corresponding to the current number of ordinary symbol reserved balls in the ordinary figure reservation storage unit provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

  In S305, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first start port sensor 20a or the second start port sensor 21a. Determine (S305). If it is determined in S305 that no game ball has entered the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309. On the other hand, if it is determined in S305 that a game ball has entered the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 (YES in S305), the number of special figure 1 hold balls (the number of first special figure hold, specifically, In step S306, it is determined whether or not the number of the first special figure holding counter provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 has reached four (upper limit). If it is determined in S306 that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has reached four (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309. If it is determined in S306 that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is less than four (NO in S306), 1 is added to the number of stored special figure 1 reserved balls (S307), and special figure 1 related random numbers are acquired. Processing is performed (S308), and the process proceeds to S309.

  In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the random symbol counter for determining whether or not the special symbol is stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM (label -TRND-A), the random number for determining the jackpot type The counter value (label-TRND-AS) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (the random number values shown in FIG. 7A), and the acquired random values (acquisition information, special information) The figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls in the first special figure storage unit 85a.

  In S309, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the third start port 26, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the third start port sensor 26a (S309). If it is determined in S309 that no game ball has entered the third start port 26 (NO in S309), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S309 that a game ball has entered the third starting port 26 (YES in S309), then the number of special figure 2 holding balls (the number of second special figure holdings, specifically the main control) It is determined whether or not the value of the counter for counting the number of second special figure reservations provided in the RAM of the unit 80 has reached four (upper limit number) (S310). If it is determined in S310 that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has reached four (YES in S310), the process ends. If it is determined in S310 that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is less than four (NO in S310), "1" is added to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls stored (S311) A random number acquisition process is performed (S312), and the process ends.

  In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S312), as in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol success / failure determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM. (Label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type determination random number counter (Label-TRND-AS), and the value of the variation pattern random number counter (Label-TRND-T1) are acquired (shown in FIG. 7A). Random number) and the obtained random number values are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved figure 2 reserved balls in the second figure reserved storage unit 85b.

[Processing at start-up]
Next, the start ball entry process (S205) will be described with reference to FIG. The game control microcomputer 81 performs a start-and-coming process (S205) following the start port sensor detection process (S204). As shown in FIG. 13, in the starting and entering ball process (S205), it is first determined whether or not the special figure 2 reserved ball number has increased by “1” (S315). If it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has increased by “1” (YES in S315), the process proceeds to S316. This corresponds to the case where “1” is added to the number of reserved figure 2 reserved balls in S307 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the second start port. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S315), the process proceeds to S319.

  In S316, the latest acquired random value (acquired information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) in the immediately preceding start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit is read ( S316). Next, the acquired random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S317). In S317, the value of the random number counter for special symbol success / failure determination (random number value for special symbol success / failure determination) among the acquired random number values read out is a big hit according to the current gaming state (low probability state or high probability state) It is determined whether or not it is off (preliminary determination). If the result of the determination is a big hit, the type of big hit is further determined (preliminary determination). The determination (preliminary determination) in S317 is a preliminary determination (so-called “hold prefetching”) in which the determination of whether or not the special figure 2 is held (determination of whether or not the big hit is made) is performed prior to the determination of whether the special figure 2 is determined or not in the special figure 2 determination process. ]).

  The prior determination of whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot determination table (see FIG. 8A), that is, a jackpot determination table for a high probability state if it is a high probability state, a normal state (low probability state). For example, based on the big hit determination table for the normal state, it is possible to determine whether or not it matches the big hit determination value (first information). Further, as other prior determination modes, as a variation pattern information determination table capable of determining variation pattern information, a variation pattern information determination table for a normal state (for a low probability state) and a high probability state (for a high probability state) And a variation pattern information determination table. In advance determination, predetermined variation pattern information is selected based on an acquired random number value (a value of a random symbol counter for special symbol success / failure determination or the like) and a variation pattern information determination table corresponding to the gaming state. Is possible. Then, from the selected variation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not it is a big hit, whether or not a big hit type, whether or not a game effect with a high hit reliability is executed.

  Next, in S318, game information (preliminary determination information) related to the determination result in S317, specifically, information indicating whether or not the special symbol success / failure determination random number value matches the jackpot determination value (first information) ( Jackpot information), information indicating the value of the jackpot type determination random number counter (random number for jackpot type determination) (hit type information), and the special symbol success / failure determination random number value match the jackpot determination value (second information). Command data including information indicating whether or not (small hit information), information indicating the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (fluctuation pattern random number value), etc. Set in the output buffer (S318). In addition, as a special figure 2 start entering command, a part or all of the special figure 2 acquisition random number value read in S316 may be transmitted to the sub-control board as it is, or the special figure 2 acquisition random number value. The game information acquired based on the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number (for example, the above-described variation pattern information) may be transmitted without transmitting as it is.

  In addition, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entering command transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub-control unit 90, whether the information is related to the big hit, which is the type of the big hit, The sub-control unit 90 can identify whether or not there is. In addition, in the present embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entering command, whether or not the special figure 2 acquisition random number acquired becomes a big hit when determined in a high probability state, and low It is possible to specify whether or not it will be a big hit when judged in the probability state. Thereby, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 start ball entering command as a hold (effect hold information), pre-determines the effect hold information at a specific timing, and determines whether or not it is a low probability state. It is possible to determine whether or not production hold information determined to be a big hit is stored.

  For the purpose of preventing fraud, the random number value for determining whether or not the special symbol is determined is not directly transmitted to the sub-control unit among the acquired random number values read out in S316, and the value of the random number counter for determining the other big hit type (big hit value) Command data including information indicating the type determination random number) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (fluctuation pattern random value) and information indicating the result of the prior determination is generated as a special figure 2 start entry command. Can be set.

  Next, in S319, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 has increased by “1” in the same manner as the process related to the special figure 2 described above (S319). If it is determined that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has increased by “1” (YES in S319), the process proceeds to S321. This corresponds to the case where “1” is added to the number of reserved balls in FIG. 1 in S311 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the first start port. On the other hand, if it is determined in S319 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has not increased (NO in S319), the process ends. The processing of S321 to S323 is the same processing as that of S316 to S318 described above with reference to FIG. That is, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit is read (S321), Pre-determination is performed on the read acquired random number value (S322). Then, command data including game information related to this pre-determination is generated as a special FIG. 1 start entering command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). Note that the prior determination (holding prefetching) in S322 is performed prior to the success / failure determination in the special figure 1 failure determination process described later.

[Usuzu movement process]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs a normal operation process (S206) shown in FIG. 14 after the start and entry process (S205). In the normal drawing operation process (S206), the processing related to the normal symbol display device 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and “normal figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4” is assigned to each of these stages. . If the “normal operation status” is “1” (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and if the “normal operation status” is “2” (S401) NO, YES in S403), normal symbol change processing (S404) is performed, and when the “normal figure movement status” is “3” (NO in S401, S403, YES in S405), the normal symbol is fixed Processing (S406) is performed, and when the “normal operation status” is “4” (NO in all of S401, S403, and S405), normal electric accessory processing (S407) is performed. The normal operation status is “1” by default.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
Next, the normal symbol standby process (S402) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of held balls of the normal symbol is “0” (S501). If it is determined that “0” is determined in S501 (YES in S501), the processing Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in S501 that it is not “0” (NO in S501), a normal symbol success / failure determination process described later is performed (S502), and then a normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, referring to the ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8 (D), if the gaming state is the high base state (state B), the normal symbol variation time is 1 second. Select the symbol variation pattern. On the other hand, if the gaming state is the low base state (states A and C), the normal symbol variation pattern with the normal symbol variation time of 3 seconds is selected. Following the normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S503), a normal symbol random number shift process (to be described later) is performed (S504), then a normal symbol variation start process is performed (S505), and the process ends. In the normal symbol variation start process (S505), the normal symbol variation display is started with the normal symbol variation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to “2”. In the normal symbol variation start process, a normal symbol variation start command is set to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of variation of the normal symbol.

[Normal symbol success / failure determination processing]
Next, the normal symbol success / failure determination process (S502) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol success / failure determination process (S502), first, the value (label-TRND-H) of the normal symbol success / failure determination random number counter stored in the general symbol hold storage unit is read (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not the gaming state is a high base state (a low probability high base state or a high probability high base state) (S602). If it is determined in S602 that the state B flag is ON, that is, it is in the high base state (YES in S602), the state B table (the hit determination) in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the winning is based on the high-probability normalization determination based on the value “0” to “238”) (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the read random number counter for normal symbol appropriateness determination (label-TRND-H) matches any of the hit determination values.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S602 that the state B flag is not ON, that is, it is determined that the low base state is set (NO in S602), the state A (state C) in the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it is a hit based on the low-probability normal / failure determination based on the table (the hit determination value is “0” to “119”) (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal map win / fail determination (S603, S604) is a hit (per normal map) (S605), and if it is determined to be out (NO in S605), the display is stopped. A normal symbol (unusual symbol) is determined (S606), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a hit (per normal map) in S605 (YES in S605), a hit normal symbol (design per universal symbol) to be stopped is determined (S607), and the per-general symbol flag is turned ON (S608). ) Finish the process.

[Normal design random number shift processing]
Next, the normal symbol random number shift process (S504) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each general map hold in the general map storage unit is shifted by one to the side read from the current position (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest-order reserved memory in the ordinary-pending storage unit, is emptied (“0”), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth ordinary-holding storage is cleared to 0 (S703). ) Finish the process. In this way, ordinary map suspension is digested in order of suspension.

[Normal symbol change processing]
Next, the normal symbol changing process (S404) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol changing process (S404), it is first determined whether or not the normal symbol change time has elapsed (S801), and if it is determined that it has not elapsed (NO in S801), the processing is performed. Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has passed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802), the normal symbol movement status is set to “3” (S803), and then the normal symbol fluctuation display is displayed. Other processing such as stopping at a display result (a hit normal symbol or a missing normal symbol) according to the determination result of the random number for normal symbol success / failure determination is performed (S804), and the processing ends.

[Normal symbol confirmation processing]
Next, the normal symbol determination process (S406) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit flag is ON (S901). If it is determined that the usual figure hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the ordinary figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal hit flag is ON (YES in S901), it is then determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in the high base state (S902). If it is determined in S902 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S902), an opening pattern for state B (for high base state) is set as an opening pattern for the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21). (S903), the process proceeds to S904. The opening pattern for state B (for high base state) is an opening pattern that repeats opening for 1.8 seconds three times as described above. Therefore, “3” is set in the second start port opening counter that counts the number of times the second start port 21 is opened.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S902), the opening pattern for the state A and the state C (for the low base state) is opened as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21). A pattern is set (S906), and the process proceeds to S904. The opening pattern for state A and state C (for the low base state) is an opening pattern in which 0.9 seconds are opened three times as described above. Therefore, “3” is set in the second start port opening counter. In S904, the normal operation status is set to “4” (S904), and this process is terminated.

[Normal electric equipment processing]
Next, the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the end-of-common-use flag is ON (S1001). The normal hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second start port 21 has ended in the auxiliary game executed as a win. If it is determined that the normal flag end flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second start port 21 is being opened (S1002). If it is determined in S1002 that the second start port is not open (NO in S1002), it is then determined whether or not it is time to open the second start port 21 (S1003). If determined (NO in S1003), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1003 that it is time to open the second start port (YES in S1003), control for opening the second start port is executed (S1004), and the process is terminated. If it is determined in S1002 that the second start port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), whether or not it is time to close the second start port 21 (that is, after the second start port 21 is opened) Whether or not a predetermined opening time has elapsed is determined (S1005). If it is determined that it is not the closing timing of the second start port (NO in S1005), the process ends. If it is determined in S1005 that the second start port is closed (YES in S1005), the second start port 21 is closed (closed) (S1006), and the value of the second start port open counter is set. Is decremented by 1 (S1007), and the process proceeds to S1008.

  In S1008, it is determined whether or not the value of the second start port opening counter is “0” (S1008). If it is determined in S1008 that the value of the opening counter is not “0” (NO in S1008), the process is finished as it is to open the second start port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1008 that the value of the release counter is “0” (YES in S1008), the base game end processing is performed to end the auxiliary game (S1009), and the base map end flag is set ( S1010), the process ends. The second start port opening counter becomes “0” when the second start port 21 is opened (opening operation of the movable member 23) three times in the state B (high base state). In the state C (low base state), when the second start port 21 is opened three times, it becomes “0”. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1001 that the end flag per map is ON (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second start port 21 for the number of times set in S903 or S906 has ended. Then, the usual figure end flag is turned OFF (S1011), the ordinary figure flag is turned OFF (S1012), the ordinary figure operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process is terminated. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal operation process (FIG. 14).

[Special Figure 1 Operation Processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 operation process (S207) following the normal operation process (S206). This special figure 1 operation process will be described with reference to FIGS. In the special figure 1 operation process (S207), as shown in FIG. 21, the process related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the big prize apparatus (the first big prize apparatus 31 and the second big prize apparatus 36) is divided into five stages. "Special figure 1 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these stages. If “Special figure 1 operation status” is “1” (YES in S1101), special symbol 1 standby processing is performed (S1102), and “Special figure 1 operation status” is “2”. (NO in S1101, YES in S1103), perform special symbol 1 fluctuation processing (S1104), and if “Special figure 1 operation status” is “3” (both NO in S1101 and S1103, YES in S1105) ), Special symbol 1 confirmation processing (S1106) is performed, and when “Special figure 1 operation status” is “4” (NO in S1101, S1103, S1105, YES in S1107), special electric as a big hit game The accessory processing 1 (S1108) is performed, and when the “special figure 1 operation status” is “5” (S1101, S1103, S1105, and S1107 are all NO), the processing ends. The special figure 1 operation status is “1” in the initial setting. In addition, since the small bonus is not set as a result of the first special symbol success / failure determination, the special electric accessory processing 2 is not executed in the special figure 1 operation process, but the small bonus is set as a result of the first special symbol successful / bad determination. May be. In this case, when the “special figure 1 operation status” is “5”, the special electric accessory processing 2 as the small hit game is executed.

[Special symbol 1 waiting process]
Next, the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of retained balls (that is, the number of retained balls in Special Figure 1) at the first start port 20 is “0” (S1201). If it is determined in S1201 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is “0”, that is, there is no memory of the random number counter value acquired based on the entry to the first starting port 20 (YES in S1201), then Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is in game (S1207). If it is determined in S1207 that the special figure 2 is playing a game (YES in S1207), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1207 that the special figure 2 is not playing (NO in S1207), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is being processed as a standby screen (during execution of a customer-waiting demo screen). (S1208). If it is determined that the standby screen is displayed (YES in S1208), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1208 that the standby screen is not displayed (NO in S1208), standby screen setting processing for displaying the standby screen is executed (S1209), and the processing is terminated.

  Further, when it is determined in S1201 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is not “0”, that is, there is one or more random number counter values acquired based on entering the first starting port 20 (in S1201) NO), special figure 1 success / failure determination process (S1203), special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1204), special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), and special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206) to be described later. Here, “Special figure 2 (second special symbol) is not playing” means that special figure 2 is not in a variable display (including a fixed stop display time) and the special figure 2 holding ball number is “0”. Means that. Of course, it means that the big hit game and the small hit game according to the special figure 2 are not executed.

[Special Figure 1 Win / Fail Judgment Processing]
Next, the special figure 1 determination processing (S1203) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 success / failure determination process (S1203), first, the determination value is stored in the lowest area of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first special figure reservation). The value (label-TRND-A) of the special symbol adequacy determination random number counter (labeled-TRND-A) is read (S1601). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 big hit fluctuation flag is ON, that is, whether or not the second special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the big hit (S1602). If it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1602), the process proceeds to S1607.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when one of the special symbols is executing the variable display related to the big hit, in the determination of whether the other special symbol is successful or not, it is not determined whether or not it is a big hit. It is either off (that is, it is not determined to be a big hit). In addition, since it does not have a small hit as a result of the first special symbol success / failure determination, when the second special symbol is executing the variable display related to the big hit, the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination executed during that time is: Everything is off. If it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 big hit fluctuation flag is not ON, that is, the second special symbol does not execute the fluctuation display related to the big hit (NO in S1602), then whether or not the probability change flag is ON, that is, It is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (S1603). In S1603, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is not ON, that is, in a low probability state (NO in S1603), the big hit determination for the normal state (for the low probability state) in the big hit determination table (FIG. 8A) The determination of success / failure is made based on the table (the jackpot determination value (first information) is “3” and “397”) (S1604). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is ON (YES in S1603), the success / failure determination is performed based on the jackpot determination table for the high probability state in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) (S1605). In the jackpot determination table for the high probability state, the jackpot determination values (first information) are “3”, “5”, “7”, “311”, “313”, “317”, “337”, “397”. ”,“ 449 ”, and“ 503 ”.

  In S1606, it is determined whether or not the result of the big hit determination (S1604, S1605) is “big hit” (S1606). If the big hit is determined (YES in S1606), the value of the big hit type determination random number counter (label −TRND−) AS) is read out, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8B (S1608), the jackpot symbol is determined based on the random number for determining the jackpot type (S1609), In FIG. 1, the big hit fluctuation flag is set to ON (S1610), and the process ends. In the case of determination of success / failure related to the first special symbol, the jackpot type determination table is determined using the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol, and in the case of determination of success / failure related to the second special symbol, it is for the second special symbol. The jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table. Further, when it is determined that the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) is a big hit, one of 15R first big hit, 4R second big hit, 4R third big hit, and 4R fourth big hit is executed. . If it is determined that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit, one of 15R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit, and 2R seventh big hit is executed (FIG. 8 (B)). On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the big hit determination (S1604, S1605) is not “big hit” (NO in S1606), the process proceeds to S1607. In S1607, the off symbol is determined (S1607), and the process ends.

  Here, in the first embodiment, as the big hit fluctuation flag, the first special big hit fluctuation flag indicating that the first special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the big hit (the fluctuation display in which the big hit symbol is stopped). And a second jackpot variation flag indicating that the second special symbol is executing a variation display related to jackpot (a variation display in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed), and the main control unit 80 A flag corresponding to the big hit fluctuation flag storage means provided in the RAM is set. In addition, as the small hit variation flag, a second small hit variation flag indicating that the second special symbol is executing a variation display related to the small hit (a variation display in which the small hit symbol is stopped), The flag corresponding to the small hit variation flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set. Then, when the big hit variation flag is set for one special symbol (that is, when the fluctuation display related to the big hit is being performed), in the other special symbol success / failure determination, processing for determining whether or not the big hit is made Not performed. That is, control is not performed in which both special symbols execute the variable display related to the jackpot in parallel. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessively large amount of gaming profit is given to the player in a very short time, and to appropriately suppress gambling.

[Special Figure 1 Variation Pattern Selection Processing]
In the special symbol 1 standby process (FIG. 22), after the special figure 1 success / failure determination process (S1203), a special figure 1 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1204). As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is state A (whether or not it is a low probability low base state) (S1701). If it is determined in S1701 that the state is A (YES in S1701), it is then determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (S1702), and the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON. If it is determined (YES in S1702), the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) is referenced with reference to the state A big hit table (the portion corresponding to state A and big hit in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). A variation pattern is selected based on (S1703). If the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. In the first embodiment, any one of the variation patterns P1 to P3 having different lengths of variation time is selected by the state A big hit table.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S1702), it is then determined whether the number of reserved balls (the number of held) is either 1 or 2 (S1705). When it is determined in S1705 that the number of holds is 1 or 2 (YES in S1705), the state A first hold number detachment table (the state A in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 1 and 2), the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). In the first embodiment, the variation patterns P4 to P7 are selected.

  Further, when it is determined in S1705 that the number of holds is neither 1 nor 2, that is, the number of holds is either 3 or 4 (NO in S1705), the state A second hold number removal table (see FIG. 9, a variation pattern is selected on the basis of the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the state A and out of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is “3” or “4”, the variation time is shorter than when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is “1” or “2”. There is a high probability that a variation pattern will be selected. In the first embodiment, the variation patterns P8 to P11 are selected. Thereby, the function of the shortening variation according to the number of reserved balls works, and the average variation time is shortened.

  If it is determined in S1701 that the gaming state is not state A (low probability low base state) (NO in S1701), then whether the gaming state is state B (low probability high base state, high probability high base state) Is determined (S1708). If it is determined in S1708 that the state is B (S1708), it is then determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (S1709), and if the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (S1709) S1709: YES), referring to the state B big hit table (the portion corresponding to state B and big hit in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), the fluctuation is based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) Select a pattern (S1710). In the first embodiment, the variation patterns P15 to P16 are selected. If it is determined in S1709 that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1709), refer to the state B departure table (the portion corresponding to state B and out of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Then, the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1711). In the first embodiment, the variation patterns P17 to P19 are selected.

  If it is determined in S1708 that the gaming state is not state B (low probability high base state, high probability high base state), that is, the gaming state is state C (high probability low base state) (NO in S1708) Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (S1712). If it is decided that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1712), the state C big hit table (see FIG. 9). A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the state C and the portion corresponding to jackpot in the variation pattern table shown (S1710). In the first embodiment, the variation pattern P23 is selected. If it is determined in S1712 that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1712), refer to the state C departure table (the portion corresponding to state C and out of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1714). In the first embodiment, the variation pattern P24 is selected.

  After the variation pattern is selected as described above, the other processing shown in FIG. 24 is executed (S1704), and the processing is terminated. In other processing (S1704), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special Figure 1 Random Number Shift Processing]
Next, the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball number is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of the various counter values in the first special figure storage unit 85a is one level lower (for example, the first special figure storage unit 85a is made up of an address space corresponding to addresses "0000" to "0003") , The address “0000” side) (S1802). Then, “0” is set in the highest address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth special figure reservation is stored (when the upper limit number is stored). The area is cleared to 0 (S1803), and this process ends. After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206) of FIG. 22 is executed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "2" and a fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM to start the fluctuation display of the first special symbol.

[Special symbol 1 changing process]
Next, the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special symbol 1 variation processing (S1104), first, the variation time of the special diagram 1 (variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in S1204 of FIG. 22, see FIG. 9) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S1901). If it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of special figure 1 has not elapsed (NO in S1901), special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing is performed (S1914), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time in FIG. In S1903, a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S1903), and the process proceeds to S1904.

  Next, in S1904, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S1905). If it is determined in S1904 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S1904), the value of the state B counter (state B variation counter) that counts the number of special symbol changes executed during state B (high base state) 1 is subtracted (S1905), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the state B counter is “0” (S1906). If it is determined in S1906 that the value of the state B counter is “0” (YES in S1906), the state B flag is turned OFF (S1907), and the process proceeds to S1908. By turning off the state B flag, the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state. Specifically, if the low-accuracy high-base state is entered, the low-accuracy low-base state (normal state) is entered. In the high-accuracy base state, “10000” is set in the state B counter. Therefore, even if the counter is subtracted for each change, the value of the state B counter is substantially “0”. Absent. That is, the highly accurate and high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

  In S1908, the special figure 1 operation status is set to “3” (S1908), and the special symbol variation display is stopped at the result according to the judgment result of the special symbol success / failure random number and jackpot type determination random number. Is performed (S1909), and the process is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Suspension Processing]
As shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. 28, the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) is displaying the fluctuation when the big hit game or the small hit game according to the special figure 2 is executed during the fluctuation display of the special figure 1. This is a process of temporarily interrupting the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol 1 and restarting the interrupted measurement when the big hit game or the small hit game ends. As a result, during the execution of the big hit game or the small hit game related to one special symbol, the success / failure determination process or the variable display related to the other special symbol is not executed.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902), it is first determined whether or not the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON (S2901). If it is determined that the special figure 1 interruption flag is not ON (NO in S2901), then, 2 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON, that is, whether or not the jackpot game according to the special figure 2 is being executed (S2902). If it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2902), then whether or not the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game according to special figure 2 is being executed It is determined whether or not (S2909). If it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON, that is, neither the big hit game nor the small hit game according to special figure 2 is executed (NO in S2909), the process is terminated. And the fluctuation display of special figure 1 is continued. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2902) and if it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2909), the special figure 1 The interruption flag is set to ON (S2903), the measurement of the special figure 1 fluctuation time is interrupted (S2904), and the process is terminated. Thereby, the fluctuation display of special figure 1 can be interrupted temporarily.

  If it is determined in S2901 that the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON, that is, it is already determined that the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted (YES in S2901), whether or not the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON. Is determined (S2905). If it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2905), it is determined that the jackpot game related to the special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2905), it is then decided whether or not the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (S2906). If it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2906), it is determined that the small hit game related to the special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON (NO in S2906), it is determined that the big hit game or small hit game related to the special figure 2 has ended, and the special figure 1 interruption flag is turned OFF. (S2907), the measurement of the special figure 1 fluctuation time is restarted (S2908), and the process is terminated. Thereby, the change display (time measurement of change time) of the 1st special symbol which was interrupted can be restarted.

  Here, in the first embodiment, as the interruption flag, a special figure 1 interruption flag (also referred to as “first interruption flag”) indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is being interrupted, and a second special symbol are displayed. A special figure 2 interruption flag (also referred to as “second interruption flag”) indicating that the variable display is being interrupted, and a flag corresponding to the interruption flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 Is set (stored).

[Special symbol 1 confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106), it is first determined whether or not the special symbol 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (S2001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S2001), the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag indicating that the big hit fluctuation display related to the first special symbol is being displayed is turned off (S2002). The special figure 1 big hit flag indicating execution of the big hit game related to the special symbol is turned on (S2003), and the process proceeds to S2004. Thereby, in FIG. 1, it can be shown that the fluctuation display related to the big hit is ended (the big hit is confirmed) and the game is shifted to the big hit game.

  In S2004, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is 15R jackpot (S2004), and if it is determined that it is 15R jackpot (YES in S2004), the round executed during the jackpot game (in the mode of opening once per round, “15” is set to the value of the round counter that counts the number of times of one round (from opening to closing of the big prize opening) (S2005), and a big hit opening command is set to start the big hit game (S2006) ), The special figure 1 operation status is set to "4" (S2007), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2004 that it is not 15R big hit (NO in S2004), since the big hit type is 4R big hit, “4” is set to the value of the round counter (S2008), and the process proceeds to S2006. In addition, a stop command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 at the stop timing of the special symbol that is variably displayed. By receiving this stop command, the sub-control board 90 can grasp that the special symbol variation display has ended. As a result, a big hit standby state is established. Also, if it is determined in S2001 that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S2001), neither big hit game nor small hit game is started, that is, the fluctuation display related to the outage. Is set to “1” (S2009), and the process ends.

  Here, in the first embodiment, as the big hit flag, a special figure 1 big hit flag ("first big hit flag" indicating that the result of the success / failure determination related to the first special symbol is a big hit and the big hit game related to the big hit is being executed. And a special figure 2 jackpot flag (also referred to as a "second jackpot flag") indicating that the result of the success / failure determination relating to the second special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot game related to the jackpot is being executed. When a big hit game is executed, a big hit flag corresponding to the big hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored). Also, as a small hit flag, a special figure 2 small hit flag ("small hit flag") indicating that the result of the determination on whether or not the second special symbol is a small hit is a small hit game related to the small hit is being executed. When a small hit game is executed, a small hit flag corresponding to the small hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored).

  Here, the round indicator 45 is composed of three LEDs, a 2R lamp, a 4R lamp, and a 15R lamp, and the corresponding lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed. Specifically, when the 4R second big hit is reached, a display mode such as “2RΔ4R ▲ 15RΔ” (for example, ▲: on, Δ: off) is displayed. Next, the special figure 2 operation process (S211) and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 39. In the special figure 2 operation process (S211), the special figure 1 operation process (S211) shown in FIGS. Since the processing is performed in the same flow as in S206), the following description is simplified.

[Special Figure 2 Operation Processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, the special figure 2 operation process (S208) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 operation process (S207) shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 operation process (S208) after the special figure 1 operation process (S207). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment can execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel by the special figure 1 operation process and the special figure 2 operation process. That is, the digestion of the first special symbol reservation and the digestion of the second special symbol retention ("change display of the first special symbol and change display of the second special symbol", "determination of the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol) The success / failure determination and “)” can be executed in parallel. Further, in the first embodiment, the determination of success / failure based on the entry to the second start opening (second special symbol success / failure determination) is more appropriate to the determination of the success / failure based on the entrance to the first start opening (first special symbol success / failure). Is more likely to be a big hit (a larger amount of profits can be acquired) for the player than the (determination) (FIG. 8B).

  As shown in FIG. 30, similar to the special figure 1 operation process (S207), the process related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the big winning devices (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) is divided into five stages. “Special figure 2 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5” is assigned to each stage. If “Special figure 2 operation status” is “1” (YES in S1151), special symbol 2 standby processing (S1152) is performed, and “Special figure 2 operation status” is “2”. (NO in S1151, YES in S1153), perform special symbol 2 fluctuation processing (S1154), and if “Special figure 2 operation status” is “3” (NO in S1151 and S1153, YES in S1155) ), Perform special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156), and if “Special figure 2 operation status” is “4” (NO in S1151, S1153, S1155, YES in S1157), special electric as a big hit game When the special treatment 1 (S1108) is performed and the “Special figure 2 operation status” is “5” (S1151, S1153, S1155, S1157 are all NO), the special electric treatment as a small hit game 2 (S1109) is performed. Note that the special figure 2 operation status is “1” in the initial setting. Since there is a small hit in the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination, the special figure 2 operation process has a special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) which is not included in the special figure 1 operation process.

  Here, the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108) is a process common to the special figure 1 operation process (S206) and the special figure 2 operation process (S211). Only the special figure 2 operation process (S211) is performed. This is because the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment can execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel, but the jackpot game and the first special symbol related to the first special symbol. This is because it is impossible to execute in parallel with the jackpot game related to 2 special symbols (only one of them can be executed). In the present embodiment, the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination does not have a small hit, but as another aspect, the result of the first special symbol correct / bad determination may have a small hit. In this case, similarly to the big hit game, the small hit game related to the first special symbol and the small hit game related to the second special symbol are not executable in parallel (only one of them can be executed).

[Special symbol 2 standby processing]
The special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) shown in FIG. 31 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) shown in FIG.

[Special Figure 2 Decision Processing]
The special figure 2 success / failure determination process (S1253) shown in FIG. 32 is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 success / failure determination process (S1203) shown in FIG. However, since this process is a process related to the special symbol 2, in S1301, the lowermost area of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first one of the second special figure reservation) is stored. The stored special symbol success / failure determination random number counter value (label-TRND-A) is read. In addition, since the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination has a small hit, if it is determined that the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is not a big hit (S1304), then in S1305, the second special symbol success / failure determination It is determined whether the result of is a small hit (S1305). If it is determined in S1305 that the game is a small hit (YES in S1305), a small hit symbol is determined (S1306), the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation flag is turned ON (S1307), and the process is terminated. The other processes are the same as those in the special figure 1 determination processing (S1203).

[Special Figure 2 Variation Pattern Selection Processing]
As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1254), the process (S1401 to S1420) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1204) shown in FIGS. )I do. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since this process is a process related to the second special symbol, referring to the column corresponding to the second special symbol of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9, based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). To select the variation pattern. In addition, since the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination has a small hit, if it is determined that the small hit variation flag is ON, a variation pattern is selected from the small hit table according to the gaming state.

  In state C, the game is performed mainly based on the change display of the second special symbol (second special symbol determination). Therefore, in state C, the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol is more than the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the variation pattern of various times (a variety of game effects can be executed) is selected. It is possible. Further, the variation time of the first special symbol is configured to be longer than the variation time of the second special symbol, thereby reducing the variation efficiency of the first special symbol. On the other hand, in the state A and the state B, the game is performed mainly by the change display of the first special symbol (first special symbol success / failure determination). Therefore, in the state A and the state B, the variation pattern of the first special symbol has more types of variation patterns (variation time) than the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and the various special effects (various game effects are produced). A feasible variation pattern can be selected. Therefore, in the state A and the state B, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is simplified (the number of types is small). In addition, the variation time of the second special symbol is configured to be longer than the variation time of the first special symbol, thereby reducing the variation efficiency of the second special symbol.

  In addition, since the state A and the state B are game states in which the game is performed mainly with the first special symbol variation display, the second special symbol variation time shortening function is deactivated, and the second special symbol variation time is reduced. It is set long. Specifically, in the state A and the state B, when the second special symbol success / failure determination is executed, the variation display time of the second special symbol is set to 110 seconds when the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit. (P12 or P20). This is set to a shorter variation time than the longest variation time set as the variation display time of the first special symbol when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit in the state A. In state B, the variation time is set to be shorter than the longest variation time set as the variation display time of the first special symbol when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit.

  In states A and B, the second special symbol success / failure determination is not the main / failure determination, but if a too long variation time is set, the player who performed the success / failure determination for the big hit must execute it. There is a possibility that the game will end. Therefore, when the result of the determination is a big hit, instead of setting a long time variation time unnecessarily, the variation time (longest one) set for the first special symbol as the subject Set a shorter variation time. As a result, if the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit, a variable time that the player can stand by is set, and the player is disadvantaged such that the profit due to the big hit that has been earned cannot be obtained. Absent. In addition, since the possibility of generating a big hit is low and the profit obtained is large, such control is performed.

  In the states A and B, when the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is a small hit, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 1000 seconds (P13 or P21). This is set to a longer variation time than the longest variation time that can be set for the first special symbol that is the main component in state A. Further, the variation time is set to be longer than the longest variation time that can be set for the first special symbol that is the main component in the state B. Of the variable display time of the second special symbol that is not the subject in the states A and B, when the result of determining whether the second special symbol is determined to be a small hit, the variable display time is longer than when the big hit and missed. Set.

  Since the states A and B are mainly based on the first special symbol success / failure determination that does not have a small hit in the result of the success / failure determination, it is not desirable that the small hits occur frequently due to the execution of the second special symbol success / failure determination. In addition, if there is a situation where small hits can occur frequently, the malicious player performs the second special symbol success / failure determination in spite of being in a gaming state mainly based on the first special symbol success / failure determination. There is a risk that game profits may be obtained by small hits. For example, there is a possibility that a game profit may be unfairly obtained due to an inappropriate game such as playing a right-handed game in a game state in which a left-handed game should be performed. In order to prevent such a situation, in the states A and B, when the result of the second special symbol non-essential determination that is not the subject is a small hit, by setting the fluctuation time to a long time (longest time), Prevents frequent occurrence of small hits (small hit games). Further, since there are not so many gaming profits that can be obtained by one small hit game, the player who caused the small hit does not cause much damage.

  In the states A and B, when the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is out of place, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 600 seconds (P14 or P22). This is set to a longer variation time than the longest variation time that can be set for the first special symbol that is the main component in state A. Further, the variation time is set to be longer than the longest variation time that can be set for the first special symbol that is the main component in the state B. In addition, the fluctuation display time of the second special symbol which is not the subject in the states A and B is shorter than the case where the determination result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and is longer than the case where the big hit. Set to. When the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is out of place, by setting the variation time of the second special symbol to a long time, the variation efficiency of the second special symbol is lowered, and in the gaming state in which the left-handed game should be performed The player is prevented from playing inappropriate games such as right-handed games. As another embodiment, the big hit and miss may be the same variation time (for example, both may be 110 seconds or both may be 600 seconds).

  In the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), after the variation pattern is selected, other processing (S1404) is performed, and this processing is completed. In other processing (S1404), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special Figure 2 Random Number Shift Processing]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), first, the special figure 2 reserved ball number is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the second special figure holding storage unit 85b is shifted to the lower side (S1502). Then, “0” is set in the uppermost address space of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth special figure reservation is stored (when the upper limit number is stored). The area is cleared to 0 (S1503), and this process ends. After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1256) of FIG. 31 is executed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1256), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "2" and a special figure 2 fluctuation start command is set in the RAM output buffer to start the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. To do.

[Special symbol 2 changing process]
The special symbol 2 changing process (S1154) shown in FIG. 36 is performed in the same flow (S1951 to S1959) as the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Suspension Processing]
The special figure 2 fluctuation interruption process (S1952) shown in FIG. 37 performs the processes (S2951 to S2959) in the same flow as the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special symbol 2 confirmation process]
The special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) shown in FIG. 38 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) shown in FIG. 29 (S2051 to S2067). Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since the special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) is a process related to the special figure 2, the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) is different from the big hit type (round counter setting process) and the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation flag. The processing when it is determined to be ON is different as shown in FIG.

[Special electric equipment processing 1 (big hit game)]
Next, the special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108), first, a jackpot game start process to be described later is executed (S2101), and the process proceeds to S2102. In S2102, it is determined whether or not the big hit start flag is ON (S2102). If it is determined that the big hit start flag is not ON (NO in S2102), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2102 that the big hit start flag is ON (YES in S2102), it is next determined whether or not the big hit end flag is ON (S2105). Here, the big hit start flag is a flag that is turned on when the player launches a game ball to the right game area 3B at an arbitrary timing and passes the game ball to the start gate 29 in the big hit standby state. . After the special symbol is confirmed and stopped with the big hit symbol and the big hit is made, the big ball start flag is turned on by passing the game ball through the start gate, and the big hit game proceeds (round game starts). Here, after the big hit, when the game ball is not passed through the start gate 29, the gaming machine is maintained in the big hit standby state where the big hit can be executed. During this time, the player can leave the seat and take a rest such as a toilet, drinks, and telephone. Then, after the end of the break, it is possible to advance the big hit game by firing the game ball at any timing of the player and passing the game ball through the start gate 29. The jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the big winning device (first big winning device 31) is all ended (the big hit game is ended) in the big hit game.

  If it is determined in S2103 that the big hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2103), then it is determined whether or not the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30) is open (S2104), and is determined not to be open. If it is (NO in S2104), is it time to open the grand prize opening (first grand prize opening 30) (round start time), that is, has it reached the time to pass the start gate 29 and start the first round? Alternatively, it is determined whether the time of the interval between rounds has elapsed and the time for starting the next round (next release) has come (S2105). If it is determined in S2105 that it is not the round start time (NO in S2105), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2105 that it is the round start time (YES in S2105), a round start command is set (S2106), a big prize opening process is performed (S2107), and the process ends. Thereby, the 1st big winning opening 30 is opened according to the opening pattern (refer to Drawing 6) according to the kind of jackpot.

  If it is determined in S2104 that the grand prize opening (first grand prize opening 30) is being opened (YES in S2104), the number of balls entered into the big prize opening in that round is the maximum number of balls that can be entered (this implementation) In Example 1, it is determined whether or not the number has reached 10 per round (S2111). If it is determined that the specified number of balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2111), then whether or not it is time to close the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30), that is, the big prize opening It is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed since the opening of (S2112). If it is determined in S2112 that the opening time of the special winning opening has not elapsed (NO in S2112), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2111 that the specified number of balls has been reached (10) (YES in S2111), or if it is determined that the opening time of the big winning opening has elapsed (YES in S2112), That is, when it is determined that one of the two round end conditions is satisfied, a process of closing the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30) is performed (S2113). Next, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2114), and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is “0” (S2115). If it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is not “0” (NO in S2115), the process ends to start the next round.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is “0” (YES in S2115), the jackpot ending command is set as a jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game (S2116), and the jackpot ending period Is started (S2117), the big hit end flag is turned ON (S2118), and the process is terminated. If it is determined in S2105 that the big hit end flag is ON (YES in S2103), since the final round has ended, it is next determined whether or not the big hit ending period has passed (S2119). If it is determined in S2119 that the predetermined ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2119), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2119 that the ending period has passed (YES in S2119), the big hit end flag is turned off (S2120), the game state setting process described later is performed (S2121), and the big hit flag is turned off (S2122). Then, the big hit start flag is turned off (S2123), special figure operation status setting processing 1 described later is performed (S2124), and the processing is terminated.

[Big hit game start processing]
Next, the big hit game start process (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. In the big hit game start process (S2101), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit start flag is ON (S2151), and it is determined that the big hit start flag is not ON, that is, the start gate 29 is not yet passed in the big hit standby state. If (NO in S2151), then it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (S2152). If it is determined that the probability variation flag is ON (YES in S2152), the probability variation flag is turned OFF (S2102). Transition to processing. In S2154, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S2103). If it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in 2154), the state B flag is turned OFF (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2156. . In other words, during execution of the big hit game, the probability change flag and the state B flag are turned OFF before the start of the big hit game (round game) in order to control the low probability state and the low base state.

  If it is determined in S2152 that the probability variation flag is not ON (NO in S2152), the process proceeds to S2154 without turning the probability variation flag OFF. If it is determined in S2154 that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S2154), the process proceeds to S2156 without turning off the state B flag. In S2156, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the start gate (S2156). If it is determined that the game has passed through the start gate (YES in S2156), a big hit game is started (round game is opened). The big hit start flag is set to ON (S2157), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2156 that the vehicle has not passed the start gate (NO in S2156), the process ends. As a result, the gaming machine is continued in the big hit waiting state. If it is determined in S2151 that the jackpot start flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot game has already started (S2151), the process is terminated. Thereby, the player can start (advance) the big hit game at an arbitrary timing.

[Game state setting process]
Next, the game state setting process (S2121) will be described with reference to FIG. In the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit game that has ended this time is related to a probable big hit (S2201). In this embodiment, as described above, five types of 15R first big hit, 4R second big hit, 4R third big hit, 15R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit are probable big hits, and in S2201, these big hit games are It is determined whether any of the five types is applicable. If it is determined that it is a probable big hit (YES in S2201), the probability change flag is turned on (S2202), and then the finished big hit game is either 4R third big hit or 2R sixth big hit. It is determined whether or not there is (S2203).

  In S2203, when it is determined that the finished big hit game is either 4R third big hit or 2R sixth big hit (YES in S2203), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), and the state B counter is set to “10000”. Set (S2205) and finish the process. As a result, the high base state is set up to 10000 times at the maximum after the big hit game is finished, and the high base state is established. The special symbol fluctuation display cannot be executed 10,000 times during the business day of the amusement store, so setting the state B counter to “10000” effectively generates the next big hit. This means that the high base state (state B) is continued. Instead of the control for setting the number of times such as “10000” times in the state B, the control may be performed to maintain the high base state (state) until the next big hit.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S2203 that the finished big hit game is neither 4R third big hit or 2R sixth big hit (NO in S2203), that is, the finished big hit game is 15R first big hit, 4R second big hit, Alternatively, if it is determined that it is one of 15R fifth big hits (NO in S2203), the process ends with the state B flag kept OFF. Thereby, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game becomes a highly accurate low base state.

  In S2201, if it is determined that it is not a probable big hit, that is, a low probability big hit (low probability big hit, normal big hit) (NO in S2201), the state B flag is turned ON (S2206), and the state B counter “100” is set (S2207), and the process ends. As a result, the high base state is set 100 times after the big hit game ends, and the low probability high base state is obtained.

  The game control microcomputer 81 (main control unit 80) that executes the game state setting process (S2121) functions as "game state control means".

[Special figure operation status setting process 1]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2124) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2124), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit flag is ON (S3001), and the special figure 1 big hit flag is ON, that is, the big hit game generated this time is a special symbol. If it is determined that the operation is related to 1 (YES in S3001), the special figure 1 big hit flag is turned OFF (S3002), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3003), and the process is terminated. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. On the other hand, when it is determined in S3001 that the special figure 1 big hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON, that is, the big hit game generated this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3001). ), The special figure 2 big hit flag is turned off (S3004), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "1" (S3005), and the process is terminated. Thus, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Special electric equipment processing 2 (small hit game)]
Next, the special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109), it is first determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small hitting end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the big winning device (second big winning device 36) has ended in the small hit game. If it is determined that the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether or not the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is being opened (S2302). If it is determined in S2302 that the big prize opening is not open (NO in S2302), whether or not it is time to open the big prize opening (second big prize opening 35), that is, the opening time per unit has elapsed Then, it is determined whether or not the time for starting the first opening operation has been reached, or the time for the interval between the plurality of times of opening has elapsed and the time for starting the next opening operation has been reached (S2303). . As for the small hit game, regardless of passing the start gate, the small hit game (opening operation) starts after a predetermined time elapses after the fixed stop symbol is displayed. That is, the player can arbitrarily determine the start time of the big hit game by the start gate, but cannot arbitrarily determine the start time of the small hit game.

  If it is determined in S2303 that it is not the time to open the special winning opening (NO in S2303), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2303 that it is the opening time of the big winning opening (YES in S2303), the second big winning opening 35 is released according to the small hit opening pattern (see FIG. 6) (S2304). Finish. If it is determined in S2302 that the big prize opening (second big prize opening 35) is being opened (YES in S2302), the number of balls entered into the big prize opening during six opening operations, that is, six times It is determined whether or not the total number of game balls that have entered in the opening operation has reached a prescribed maximum number of balls (10 in the first embodiment) (S2306). If it is determined in S2306 that the specified number of balls has not been reached (NO in S2306) (NO in S2306), whether or not it is time to close the big prize opening, that is, the predetermined prize is opened after the big prize opening is opened. It is determined whether or not the opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed (S2307). If it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the special winning opening has not elapsed (NO in S2307), the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of balls entered into the grand prize opening during the six opening operations has reached the prescribed number of balls (10) (YES in S2306), the big prize opening (second grand prize winning) The mouth 35) is closed (S2314), and the process proceeds to the small hit end processing of S2311. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the big prize opening has passed (YES in S2307), the big prize opening (second big prize opening 35) is closed (S2308), and the value of the small hitting opening counter is set. It is decremented by 1 (S2309), and it is determined whether or not the value of the small hit release counter is “0” (S2310). If it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hitting release counter is not “0” (NO in S2310), the process is terminated as it is to start the next release operation.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit release counter is “0” (YES in S2310), the process proceeds to the small hit end process in S2311. In S2311, as a small hit end process to end the small hit game, a small hit ending command is set (S2311), a small hit ending period is started (S2312), a small hit end flag is set (S2313), Finish the process. The small hit opening counter becomes “0” when the large winning opening is opened six times.

  Also, if it is determined in S2301 that the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), 6 opening operations have been completed (or a specified number of game balls have entered) It is determined whether or not the small ending time has elapsed (S2315). If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2315), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2315 that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned off (S2316), special figure operation status setting processing 2 is performed (S2317), and the processing is terminated. By generating a small hit game in a highly accurate and low base state, it is possible to aim for the next big hit while increasing the number of balls, which enhances the entertainment of the game. Note that the probability variation flag and the state B flag are not switched from ON to OFF or switched from OFF to ON at the start of the small hit game. Also, at the end of the small hit game, the game state setting process is not performed. That is, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming state (probability state, base state) is not changed before and after the execution of the small hit game.

[Special figure operation status setting process 2]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON (S3101), and the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game generated this time. Is determined to be related to special symbol 1 (YES in S3101), the special figure 1 small hit flag is turned off (S3102), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3103), and the processing is performed. Finish. Thus, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. In this embodiment, since the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination does not have a small hit, the special figure 1 small hit flag is not turned ON. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game generated this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3101) ), The special figure 2 small hit flag is turned OFF (S3104), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "1" (S3105), and the process is terminated. Thus, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Reserved ball count processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved ball number process (S209) following the special figure 2 operation process (S208). As shown in FIG. 45, in the reserved ball number processing (S209), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read ( S2501). Next, the data on the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls for transmitting the reserved ball number information to the sub-control board 90 or the like) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502), and the process ends.

[Power-off monitoring processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power-off monitoring process (S210) subsequent to the reserved ball number process (S209). As shown in FIG. 46, in the power-off monitoring process (S210), first, it is determined whether or not a power-off signal is input (S2601). If it is determined that there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2601 that a power-off signal has been input (YES in S2601), the current gaming machine status (whether it is probable, whether it is a winning game, the number of held balls, (S2602), the power-off flag is turned on (S2603), and then loop processing (infinite loop) is performed without returning to interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

  As described above in detail, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment is provided with the above-described characteristic configuration, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a characteristic effect that does not exist in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, or compared with the conventional pachinko gaming machine. And has a remarkable effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment is a big hit in the special symbol determination (first special symbol (also referred to as “first information”) or second special symbol (also referred to as “second information”). A high probability state (given a privilege) based on a symbol (also referred to as a “specific display mode”), and a high probability state (privilege) when a predetermined condition is established. Is supposed to end.

  The process of giving this high probability state (privilege) (game state setting process (S2121)) can also be called “privilege grant means”. Since the first special symbol and the production symbol 8 are linked (synchronized), the second special symbol and the production symbol 8 are linked (synchronized), the variable display and the stop display are performed, and the same determination result is obtained. , "The special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol" can be replaced with "the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the bonus symbol (specific display mode)". .

[Sub control main processing]
Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 (control processing by the sub control unit 90) will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the counter, flag, status, buffer, timer, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (sub control unit). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided in the sub control board 90 reads out and executes the program of the sub control main process shown in FIG. 47 from the ROM of the sub control board 90. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, first, a CPU initialization process is performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) setting, various flags, status and counter reset, etc. are performed.

  Subsequently, in S4002, it is determined whether the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub control board 90. That is, if the power-off signal is not ON, or if the RAM contents are not normal even if the power-off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub control board 90 is initialized. If the power-off signal is turned on but the contents of the RAM are maintained normally (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. If the RAM is initialized, various flags, statuses, and counter values are reset. Note that S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and are not executed thereafter. In the first embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the same process as the power-off monitoring process (S209) by the game control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. When turned ON, data related to the effect control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, data related to presentation control at the time of power interruption such as a power failure is backed up. Therefore, unless the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003) at power-on after power-off such as power failure (power-off recovery), effect control by the effect control microcomputer 91 is performed. Will return to the state before the power failure occurred.

  In S4004, interrupts are prohibited. Next, random number seed update processing is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various effect determination random number counters are updated. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub control board 90. For the effect determination random number, a random effect determination random number for determining the aspect of the effect symbol game effect to be executed (variation effect pattern), a notice effect determination random number for determining the notification effect, and an effect symbol determination for determining the effect symbol There are random numbers. The random number update method can be the same as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. When updating the random number, the random number value may be added two by two instead of adding one by one. The effect determining random number is acquired at a predetermined timing. As this timing, for example, a control signal (start start ball command) notifying that a start ball has been sent from the main control board 80, or a control signal (notifying the start of fluctuation from the main control board 80) ( For example, when a variation start command) is transmitted, or when a variation effect pattern to be described later is determined. The storage location of the acquired effect determination random number is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) in the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

  When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, a command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in an output buffer (also referred to as “sub output buffer”) in the RAM of the sub control board 90 are transferred to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, and the lamp control. It transmits to the control board which becomes a corresponding command transmission destination among the boards 107. Each control board (each control unit) that has received the command uses various rendering devices (image display device, speaker 67, panel lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) according to the received command. (Effect design game effects, special game effects related to winning games, etc.) are executed. Next, the production control microcomputer 91 permits interruption (S4007). Thereafter, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are permitted, reception interrupt processing (S4008), 2 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control of effect symbols and the like executed on the display screens of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. It is also possible to perform lighting control of various lamps, operation control of the movable decorative member, sound output control from a speaker, and the like.

[Reception interrupt processing]
Next, the reception interrupt process (S4008) will be described with reference to FIG. In the reception interrupt process (S4008), first, it is determined whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, whether or not the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input section of the effect control microcomputer 91. Determine (S4101). If it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and the process is finished. . This reception interrupt process (S4008) is a process executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) will be described with reference to FIG. The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process executed whenever an interrupt pulse with a 2 msec cycle is input to the sub control board 90. In the 2 ms timer interruption process (S4009), first, an input process for creating switch data (edge data and level data) based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d is performed (S4201). Next, lamp data output processing (S4202) for outputting lamp data for emitting lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 and driving data for driving the movable decorative member 14 (electrical drive source) are output. Drive data output processing (S4203). The lamp data and the drive data are created by a 10 ms timer interrupt process described later. Then, a watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) will be described with reference to FIG. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse with a 10 msec cycle is input to the sub control board 90. In the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, a received command analysis process (S4302) described later is performed. Next, switch state acquisition processing is performed in which the switch data created in the 2 ms timer interrupt processing is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as switch data for 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4303), and the switch stored in the switch state acquisition processing Based on the data, switch processing for setting the display content of the display screen 7a is performed (S4304). Thereafter, other processes such as creating lamp data (data for controlling lighting of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and updating the effect determination random number are executed (S4305).

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. In the received command analysis process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not a start incoming command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and when it is determined that a start incoming command has not been received (NO in S4401). When the process proceeds to S4403 and it is determined that the start pitching command is received (YES in S4401), the production hold information storage process (S4402) is performed, and the process proceeds to S4403. The production hold information storage process (S4402) is a process for determining various kinds of information (preliminary judgment result, jackpot type determination disturbance) included in the start ball entering command (Special Figure 1 start ball entering command or Special Figure 2 start ball entering command) received in S4401. (Game information such as numerical value, fluctuation pattern random number value, etc.) according to the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the number of special figure holding balls at the time of sending and receiving the start incoming ball command (at the time of command generation) In the shift memory format, the information is stored in a predetermined production hold information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. For example, if the received start pitch command is a special Fig. 1 start pitch command corresponding to the number of held balls "4" in Fig. 1, the pre-determination result and hit type included in the special map 1 start pitch command Are stored as special figure 1 production hold information in the area corresponding to the number of holds 4 in the special figure 1 production hold information storage area. The effect hold information stored in this way is used to execute various effects such as a change effect, a notice effect, and an effect mode, which will be described later. The contents stored in the effect hold information storage area (effect hold information) in the sub control board 90 are the special figure hold storage parts (first special figure hold storage part, second special figure) in the main control board (main control part) 80 described above. This is consistent with the stored content (acquired information) of the hold storage unit. From this, it can be said that the production hold information storage area of the sub-control board 90 is also “acquired information storage means”.

  Next, in S4403, it is determined whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4403). If it is determined that a variation start command has been received (YES in S4403), a variation effect start process (described later) ( S4404) is performed, and the process proceeds to S4405. If it is determined that the variation start command is not received (NO in S4403), the process proceeds to S4405 without performing the variation effect start process. In S4405, it is determined whether or not a variation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4405). If it is determined that a variation stop command has been received (YES in S4405), the effect design is stopped and displayed. A variation effect end process to be ended is performed (S4406). In the variation effect end process (S4406), a variation effect end command for stopping and displaying the effect symbol 8 and ending the variation effect is set in the sub output buffer. When the set variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 displays the effect symbol 8 that has been variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The stop effect is displayed, and the variation effect (the effect symbol game effect) is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4405 that the change stop command has not been received (NO in S4405), the process proceeds to S4407 without performing the change effect end process. The variation effect refers to various effects performed in accordance with the variation display of the special symbol.

  Subsequently, in S4407, it is determined whether a hit game-related command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4407). Here, the hit game-related command is a command transmitted from the main control board 80 in executing the hit game (big hit game, small hit game), and specifically, the start of the big hit game (occurrence of the big hit game) ) Opening command sent at the time of the round, Round start command sent at the start of the round, Round end command sent at the end of the round, Ending command sent at the end of the jackpot game, First big winning prize in round game For example, the first big prize entry command sent based on the entry to 30th, the second big prize entry command sent based on the entry to the second big prize entry in the small hit game, etc. . In S4407, it is determined whether or not any of these jackpot game-related commands has been received. If not received (NO in S4407), the process proceeds to S4409, and if received (YES in S4407). Then, processing related to the execution of the effect (big hit game effect, small hit game effect) according to the type of the received command is performed (S4408).

  For example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening effect command for specifying an opening effect corresponding to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer, and if the command is a round start command, the command Set the round production command that specifies the round production according to the round specified based on the sub output buffer, and if it is an ending command, the ending that specifies the ending production according to the jackpot type specified based on the command Set the production command in the sub output buffer. In addition, if the received command is a winning game entrance command (a first winning game entrance command, a second winning game entrance command), a winning game specified based on the command (first winning game) The entrance effect command designating the entrance effect corresponding to the entrance to the entrance 30 and the second grand prize opening 35) is set in the sub output buffer. When various effect commands related to the set winning game are transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 performs an opening effect or a round according to the progress of the winning game. An effect, a ball effect, etc. are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Finally, the process of S4409 is performed, and this process ends. In S4409, as other processing, processing based on other received commands (for example, a normal symbol variation start command and a normal symbol variation stop command) excluding the various commands described above is performed (S4409).

[Variation production start processing]
Next, the variation effect start process (S4404) executed in the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. In the variation effect start processing (S4404), first, effect determination random number processing (S4501) for obtaining various effect determination random numbers such as a random effect determination random number, a notice effect determination random number, an effect symbol determination random number, and the like is performed. In this embodiment, the process of S4501 is performed at the timing when the variation start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is acquired from each random number. Based on the acquired value (acquired information), the aspect of the effect design game effect (variation effect) to be executed, the mode of the notice effect (including presence / absence of the notice effect), the effect symbol to be stopped and the like are determined.

  Next, in S4502, the received variation start command is analyzed (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern designation command (information for designating the variation pattern) for designating the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In the variation pattern designation command, variation pattern information (P1 to P33) shown in FIG. 9, game state information designating the current gaming state, determination of first special symbol success determination or second special symbol success determination The result includes symbol information for designating the jackpot type (see FIG. 8). In addition, since there are a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the first special symbol and a variation corresponding to the second special symbol, by analyzing the variation pattern designation command, the effect symbol game effect to be started this time It is possible to determine whether the (variation display of the effect symbol) relates to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. Note that the variation pattern information, the game state information, the symbol information, and the like can be used in processes other than the variation effect start process to be executed thereafter.

  Next, in S4503, the production control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining a production mode to be executed. The mode status is any value from “1” to “5”, and each value is assigned to the production modes A to E. Specifically, mode status “1” corresponds to effect mode A, mode status “2” corresponds to effect mode B, mode status “3” corresponds to effect mode C, and mode status “4” corresponds to effect mode B. Corresponding to the production mode D, the mode status “5” corresponds to the production mode E. By referring to the current mode status, it is possible to specify the current production mode.

  Here, the effect mode is an aspect of the effect mainly of the image display device 7, and if the effect mode is different, some or all of the effect aspects of the game effect such as the notice effect and the reach effect are different. . Specifically, the image displayed on the image display device 7 is different depending on the effect mode, such as the aspect of the effect pattern 8 (for example, the pattern design, the number design, etc.) or the characters, items, and background images that appear is different. It will be different. In addition, the effect design game effect can also be executed in a mode according to the effect mode, and when providing a plurality of game effects (notice effect, reach effect, etc.), it is possible to execute game effects that differ depending on the effect mode. It can be. In the present embodiment, the production modes A and B are executed when the low-accuracy low base state is controlled, and the production modes C and D are executed when the high-accuracy low base state is controlled. Is executed when the low-accuracy base state is controlled and when the high-accuracy base state is controlled. Therefore, when the production mode is any one of A to D, the player confirms the production mode, thereby grasping whether the current gaming state is the low probability low base state or the high probability low base state. It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the production mode is E, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the current gaming state is the low probability high base state or the high accuracy high base state even if the production mode is confirmed. is there. In that sense, the production mode E can be said to be a gaming state non-notification mode.

  Next, in S4504, the change display is performed using the image display device 7, the panel lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14 and the like, and is controlled by the sub-control unit 90 (variation effect pattern, effect design). A variation effect pattern determination table (not shown) and a notice effect determination table for determining (game effect) are set (S4504). Specifically, based on the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 and the change pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80, the change effect pattern determination table to be used and the notice effect determination table are set. . That is, a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables and a plurality of notice effect determination tables are provided, and a predetermined variable effect pattern determination table and a notice effect determination table are set based on the gaming state (effect mode) and the like. To do. For example, when the variation pattern information designated by the received variation pattern designation command is “P1 (variation pattern P1)” (see FIG. 9), as a variation presentation pattern determination table, the big hit time corresponding to the current presentation mode A variation effect pattern determination table and a notice effect determination table are set. The variation effect pattern determination table is mainly for determining the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect (the variation pattern of the effect symbol etc.), and a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables (mode status) corresponding to the effect mode (mode status). (Not shown) is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 in advance. In S4504, a table corresponding to the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 is selected and set from the variation effect pattern determination tables.

  Next, in S4505, based on the random effect determination random number acquired in S4501 and the variable effect pattern determination table set in S4504, a variable effect pattern suitable for the specified variation pattern is selected and set ( S4505). As the variation effect pattern, a variation mode of the effect symbol 8 displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b (execution mode of the effect symbol game effect) is set. Thereby, in the effect design game effect, when the reach effect is executed (reach effect effect game effect), when the character effect performed using a specific character (character effect symbol game effect), the reach effect or character In the case where the effect is not executed (reach no effect design game effect) or the like is determined. The reach effect is, for example, that the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all the same as the display pattern of the effect symbol 8 when the result of the special symbol success / failure determination indicates that it is a big hit. In the case where a mode (a big hit mode, a specific mode) is provided, two of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped display (temporary stop display) with a symbol (the same effect symbol) constituting the big hit mode Whether or not the remaining one effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbols (three identical effect symbols) that complete the jackpot mode in a state where the remaining one is continuously displayed in a variable manner (scroll display). This refers to the production that shows. At this time, the game effect is executed using a predetermined character in accordance with the variation display of the effect symbol, and whether or not the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a big hit mode is determined whether the predetermined character achieves the predetermined purpose. It is also possible to show in the production. Such game effects (reach effects and character effects described later) can also be referred to as story effects (specific game effects) and purpose effects (specific game effects). As a result, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the big hit and enhance the gaming interest.

  In S4505, based on the random number for determining the effect symbol acquired in S4501 and the stop symbol determination table (not shown), the effect symbol 8 to be stopped and displayed (also referred to as “stop effect symbol”) is determined and set. The effect symbol 8 that is stopped and displayed as a result of the effect symbol game effect is that the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is out of reach, and if the reach is out of reach, three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as “787” are displayed. Among them, one effect symbol is different from the other effect symbols, and when it is out of reach, at least one effect symbol of three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as “635” is the other The production pattern is different

  In S4506, a notice effect (notice effect pattern) to be executed in association with the change effect pattern (effect design game effect) is determined. Moreover, it is also called an effect symbol game effect including the notice effect to be executed. This notice effect is an effect (preliminary) showing the possibility that the result of the effect effect game effect being executed will be stopped and displayed in a big hit mode before the effect symbol is stopped (determination stop display) Notification effect). In S4506, based on the random number for determining the notice effect obtained in S4501 and the notice effect determination table set in S4504, the designated change pattern and the notice effect (notice effect pattern) suitable for the determined change effect pattern are selected. This is set (S4506).

  Then, in S4507, based on the change effect pattern and the notice effect set in S4505 and S4506, a change effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect or the like is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub control board 90 ( S4507), the variation production start process is terminated. When the variation effect start command set in S4507 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 determines the variation effect pattern specified based on the variation effect start command, that is, S4505. Predetermined image data corresponding to the variation effect pattern set in (1) is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the variation effect or the like based on the read image data is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Moreover, the fluctuation display (flashing display) by two LEDs on the effect display 102 is also executed.

[Outline of production design game production]
Next, an outline of the effect symbol game effect (variation effect) of the present embodiment will be described. As described above, when the change effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect or the like based on the change effect pattern or the like set in S4505 is transmitted from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the image display device 7 On the display screen 7a, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started. An effect symbol game effect (variation effect) is configured as a series of effects from the start to the end (stop) of the variation display of the effect symbol 8.

  As for the variation display of the production symbol 8, in principle, the symbols are scrolled in the vertical direction in the order of “1” → “2” → “3”... → “7” → “8” → “9” (ascending order) ( Vertical scrolling) is performed by returning to “1” again when reaching “9” and repeating vertical scrolling. Such a variation display mode of the effect symbol 8 is determined by the variation effect pattern stored in the above-described variation effect pattern determination table. For this reason, in addition to vertical scrolling, various display modes such as horizontal scrolling display (horizontal scrolling) and switching display in which symbols (numbers) are sequentially switched on the spot without scrolling can be used. It is possible to provide an aspect as a variation effect pattern. It is also possible to provide a mode in which the symbols “1” to “9” are variably displayed in descending order. Furthermore, it is also possible to set a variation display mode according to the effect mode and the gaming state.

  In addition, the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed according to the variation time determined by the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation display is stopped as the variation time elapses. In this embodiment, the variation display is stopped. A plurality of stop modes (stop patterns) are provided as modes. Specifically, as the main stop mode, (1) The stop order (also referred to as “stop order”) of each of the design symbols 8L (left symbol), 8C (middle symbol), and 8R (right symbol) is “left symbol”. → Stop mode (also referred to as “first stop mode”) with “middle symbol → right symbol”, and (2) stop mode with “(left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol)” as the stop order of each symbol (“ (Also referred to as “second stop mode”) and (3) a stop mode (also referred to as “third stop mode”) in which all stop timings (stop timings) of the symbols are substantially the same (also referred to as “simultaneous stop”). And (4) a stop mode (also referred to as a “fourth stop mode”) in which the stop time of the left symbol and the right symbol is substantially the same, and the middle symbol thereafter stops. These stop modes (stop patterns) are included in the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect, and it is determined in which stop mode the variable display is stopped depending on the variable effect pattern selected (set) in S4505. It has become a thing. That is, in this embodiment, the selection / determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern also serves as the selection / determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). However, the selection / determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern and the selection / determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern) can be performed separately. The first stop symbol in the stop order is also called the “first stop symbol”, the second stop symbol in the stop order is also called the “second stop symbol”, and the stop order is the third stop symbol. This is also referred to as “third stop symbol” or “final stop symbol”.

  Among the first to fourth stop modes, the first stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol) is the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination mainly in the production mode C (state C). This is a stop mode that can be executed when the change display is stopped when the change display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the fact that it is “winning”.

  In the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol), the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “out” or “big hit” mainly in (1) production mode A and B (state A). In the case where the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the fact that, in (2) the effect mode E (state B), the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “out” or “big hit” When the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed in a variation mode with reach (also referred to as “reach variation”) or a variation mode without reach (also referred to as “normal variation”), and (3) effect mode C ( In the state C), the variation display when the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed by reach variation or normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination being “out” or “big hit” This is a stop mode that can be executed when stopping

  The third stop mode (simultaneous stop of all symbols) is mainly under the condition that the function of shortening variation according to the number of special figure reservation balls works (1) at the time of production mode A, B (state A) The special figure 1 reserve ball number is “3” or “4”) and the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “out”, and based on this, the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed with normal variation , (2) When the production mode E (state B), the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed with normal variation based on the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination being “out”, and (3 ) Stopping the variation display when the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed in the normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination being “out” in the production mode C (state C) This is a stop mode that can be executed.

  In the fourth stop mode (simultaneous stop of left and right symbols → middle symbol), the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is “out” or “big hit” mainly in the production mode C (state C). When the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on reach variation, and (2) in the effect mode E (state B), the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “out” or “hit” This is a stop mode that can be executed when the change display is stopped when the change display of the effect symbol 8 is performed by reach change.

  In this way, a plurality of stop modes when stopping the variable display of the effect symbol 8 are provided depending on the effect mode (game state) and the variation display mode and result (stop display mode) based on the result of the special symbol success / failure determination. Thus, the stop mode can be varied depending on the game situation. In addition, for the player, paying attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 stops, it is possible to guess the display mode (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 displayed (derived display) thereafter. Through this stop mode, it is possible to infer the types of special games that can be executed, the presence / absence of execution, the possibility, and the like. Thereby, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the stop mode when the variable display stops and to give a sense of expectation for the subsequent special game.

  In addition to the first to fourth stop modes, for example, a stop mode (fifth stop mode) in which the stop order of the three symbols constituting the effect symbol 8 is “right symbol → left symbol → middle symbol”. ), And a stop mode (sixth stop mode) in which the stop time of the left symbol and the middle symbol is substantially the same, and the right symbol is stopped thereafter (sixth stop mode). The conditions under which the aspect is executed are not limited to the present embodiment, and can be variously determined.

  In this embodiment, the symbols “1” to “9” constituting the effect symbol 8 are colored so that the symbols can be classified by color, and the symbol classification (group) is determined by the color. The symbol classification differs depending on the gaming state (effect mode). Specifically, in state A (effect modes A and B), among the symbols “1” to “9”, “3” and “7” are red symbols (hereinafter also referred to as “red symbols”), and “1” ”,“ 5 ”and“ 9 ”are green symbols (hereinafter also referred to as“ green symbols ”), and“ 2 ”,“ 4 ”,“ 6 ”and“ 8 ”are blue symbols (hereinafter also referred to as“ blue symbols ”). Say). On the other hand, in states B and C (effect modes C, D, and E), “3”, “5”, and “7” are red symbols among the symbols “1” to “9”, and “1”, “4” ”,“ 9 ”are green symbols, and even numbers“ 2 ”,“ 6 ”,“ 8 ”are blue symbols.

  Note that the correspondence relationship between the pattern and the color shown in the present embodiment is merely an example, and it is possible to adopt a correspondence relationship other than this, and the type of color is not limited to this embodiment, and other colors Can be used. Further, in this embodiment, the classification of the symbols (red symbol, green symbol, blue symbol) is determined by color, but it can be determined by elements other than colors. For example, in the case where a character is attached to a production symbol, the type of character (friend character, enemy character, etc.), or the production symbol (character design) representing a predetermined character in addition to the production symbol (numerical symbol) representing a number ) May be determined according to the number symbol and the character symbol, and may further be determined according to the odd symbol and the even symbol.

  The effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner, and the symbol combination (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 (8L, 8C, 8R) displayed (derived display) when the variable display is stopped according to the stop mode described above. The result of the fluctuation display is notified. In the present embodiment, as the basic symbol combination (stop display mode), the “completely broken eyes” (“124”, etc.) in which the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all different symbols (numbers) and the effect symbols. 8L (left symbol) and effect symbol 8R (right symbol) are the same symbol (number), and the remaining effect symbol 8C (middle symbol) is a symbol (number) different from the others, such as “reach rose eyes” (“343”, etc. ) Is a detachment mode (non-specific mode) that does not trigger the winning game. On the other hand, “Zoro-me” (“777”, etc.) in which all of the three production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are the same is regarded as a big hit mode (specific mode) that triggers the execution of a big hit game of 4R or higher (see FIG. 6). Yes.

  Assuming such a basic symbol combination, in this embodiment, the “reach ballet” is also used as a 2R jackpot mode that triggers the execution of the 2R jackpot game (see FIG. 6). . This is because the 2R jackpot game has a smaller number of prize balls (the number of winning prize balls) that the player can acquire than the jackpot game of 4R or higher (4R jackpot game, 15R jackpot game), state C (high It is a special game that triggers the setting of state B (high base state), which makes it difficult to obtain a prize ball (increase in possession) in a small hit game compared to (probably low base state), that is, for the player This is because it is a special game with a relatively low advantage (profit amount). In addition, the “completely broken eyes” among the broken eyes are also used as a small hit mode that triggers the execution of the small hit game (second special symbol) in the state B (high base state). As described above, in the state B, since the second start port 21 is in an open state for most of the period, the small winning big winning port (the second winning port located on the downstream side of the second start port 21 (second This is because it is difficult to enter the big prize opening 35), and the possibility of obtaining a profit by small hits is extremely low (infinitely close to zero) (substantially equivalent to a loss). Further, a “specific breaker”, which will be described later, among the breaker eyes is a small hit mode that triggers the execution of a small hit game (second special symbol small hit) in the state C (highly accurate low base state). Here, the small hit mode (specific rose eyes) is also referred to as a “first display mode”, and the big hit mode (double eyes) is also referred to as a “second display mode”. Reaching out of reach) is also referred to as “third display mode”, and out of dislocation mode (completely splitting, reaching out) is also referred to as “fourth display mode”.

  In addition, since the state A (low probability low base state) is a gaming state that is basically based on the left-handed game, the first special symbol propriety determination (firstly based on the entrance to the first starting port 20 (first) 1 special symbol variation display) is performed, and it is rare that the second special symbol success / failure determination (second special symbol variation display) is performed during the first special symbol variation display. When the second special symbol success / failure determination is performed under a difficult situation, the variation display of the production symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variation by the production display 102 is performed. Only display (and stop display) is performed. Similarly, the state B (high base state) is a gaming state in which right-handed gaming is basically performed, and the first special symbol success / failure determination (first special symbol determination based mainly on the ball entering the second starting port 21) This is the case because it is rare that the second special symbol determination (variation display of the second special symbol) is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol. When the second special symbol success / failure determination is performed below, the variation display of the production symbol 8 corresponding thereto is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variation display ( And stop display) only.

  Similarly, since the state C (highly accurate low base state) is a gaming state that is based on the right-handed game, the second special symbol propriety determination mainly based on the entrance to the third starting port 26 ( Since the second special symbol variation display) is performed, it is rare that the first special symbol success / failure determination (the first special symbol variation display) is performed during the second special symbol variation display. When the first special symbol determination is made under such circumstances, the variation display of the production symbol 8 corresponding to the first special symbol is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, but by the production display 102. Only variable display (and stop display) is performed.

  However, when a special symbol success / failure determination contrary to the current game state (left-handed game, right-handed game) is performed and a determination result of “big hit” is obtained (for example, in state C, the first special symbol success / failure determination is If the result is a big hit), one or more display devices among the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 provide an effect display that suggests the occurrence of the big hit. Do. As a result, while the effect display (variation effect) of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to the current gaming state (the change display of the main special symbol) is mainly performed on the display screen 7a, it is performed in parallel with the change display of the main special symbol. It is possible to inform the player that the result of the change display of the special symbol displayed is a big hit. In addition, by suggesting the occurrence of a jackpot, it is possible to avoid a situation where the player loses the opportunity to gain profits by stopping the game without noticing the occurrence of the jackpot.

[Other aspects]
Further, in the first embodiment described above, when the gaming state after the big hit game is set to the high probability high base state, the high probability high base state is a specification that continues until the next big hit occurs. If the gaming state after the big hit game is set to the high-accuracy base state in addition to or in addition to such a big hit type, the number of times determined in advance in the high-accuracy high-base state If the big win is not made until the special symbol variation display of (50 or 100) is completed, a big hit type in which the gaming state changes to the high probability low base state may be provided. By providing such a big hit type, the gaming state after the big hit game becomes a high base state, and when a special symbol variation display of a predetermined number of times is executed in the high base state, depending on the big hit type, The game state has a case of shifting to the low probability and low base state, a case of continuing the high probability and high base state, and a case of shifting to the high probability and low base state.

  As a result, it is possible to diversify the game mode change mode (transition mode), increase the game playability, and enhance the game entertainment. In addition, by executing a common game effect in a high base state from the end of the big hit game until a predetermined number of special symbol variations are displayed, a predetermined number of special symbol variations are displayed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize which game state the game state is to be transferred to after the game is executed. Thereby, the player's gaming interest in the high base state is enhanced, and the expectation for an advantageous state is enhanced. In addition, even if the gaming state after the big hit game is not in the high probability low base state but in the high base state, the game state is changed to the high probability low base state after a predetermined number of fluctuations thereafter. It is possible to play games with the expectation of In addition, this makes it possible to maintain the gaming interest for a long time.

  In the first embodiment, the first special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a and second special symbol display 41b) and the second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the fluctuation state display 49). ) Are controlled by the main control unit. In place of such a mode, the first special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) is controlled by the main control unit, and the second special symbol display (variation) Display control of c1 and c2) of the status indicator 49 may be performed by another control unit such as a sub-control unit. Thereby, even if a failure occurs in the display control of one control unit, it is possible to notify correct game information if the display control of the other control is appropriate. Further, both the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display are provided in the same display section (main display 40). Thereby, the first special symbol display device controlled by the main control unit and the second special symbol display device controlled by the sub control unit are provided in the vicinity so that the consistency of the display contents of both can be confirmed and the display control can be performed. It is possible to easily check whether there is any problem with the device.

  Similarly, in the first embodiment, the main control unit controls the display of the first normal symbol display (normal symbol display 42) and the second normal symbol display (c3 of the fluctuation state display 49). To do. In place of such a mode, the display control of the first normal symbol display (normal symbol display 42) is performed by the main control unit, and the second normal symbol display (c3 of the fluctuation state display 49) is sub-controlled. The display may be controlled by another control unit such as a unit. Thereby, there exists an effect similar to the special symbol display mentioned above.

  Further, in addition to the second special symbol display and the second normal symbol display, a second first special figure hold indicator, a second second special figure hold indicator (not shown), a second common figure, not shown. A hold indicator may be provided. At this time, the first special figure hold indicator (first special figure hold indicator 43a, second special figure hold indicator 43b) and the second special figure hold indicator (general figure hold indicator 42) are main-controlled. Other control units such as a sub-control unit, the second special figure hold indicator (the first special figure hold indicator, the second special figure hold indicator), the second special figure hold indicator You may make it control by. In addition, the first special figure hold indicator (first special figure hold indicator 43a, second special figure hold indicator 43b), the first special figure hold indicator (general figure hold indicator 42), the first Two special figure hold indicators (second first special figure hold indicator, second second special figure hold indicator) and second universal figure hold indicator may be provided on the same main indicator 40. it can. As a result, it is possible to improve the listability of the both, easily check the consistency of the display contents, and easily check whether there is a problem in the display control.

  Also, a first special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a and second special symbol display 41b), a first normal symbol display (normal symbol display 42), a first special symbol hold display (First special figure hold indicator 43a, second special figure hold indicator 43b), first general figure hold indicator (common figure hold indicator 42), second special symbol indicator (variation state indicator 49) C1 and c2), the second normal symbol display (c3 of the fluctuation state display 49), the second special figure hold indicator (the second first special figure hold indicator, the second second special figure) The hold indicator) and the second general-purpose hold indicator may all be provided on the same main indicator 40. As a result, it is possible to improve the listability of these display units and easily check whether there is a problem in the display control by the main control unit and the display control by the sub control. The main display 40 can be provided outside (outside) the game area 3. Further, it can be provided on the game board 2 outside (outside) the game area 3.

  In addition, when power is turned off for some reason (power interruption processing) during a game or during operation of the gaming machine (power ON), the display is controlled by the main control unit when power is supplied again. Special symbol indicators (first special symbol indicator 41a and second special symbol indicator 41b), first normal symbol indicator (normal symbol indicator 42), first special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator) The figure hold indicator 43a, the second special figure hold indicator 43b), and the first general figure hold indicator (common figure hold indicator 42) execute display (display control) first (restart and return). The second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the fluctuation state indicator 49), the second normal symbol display (c3 of the fluctuation state indicator 49), the second special figure, which are display-controlled by the sub-control unit. On-hold indicator (second first special figure hold indicator, second second special figure hold indicator), second general figure hold示器 run the display (display control) after the (resumption, return) to.

  However, the second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the fluctuation state display 49), the second normal symbol display (c3 of the fluctuation state display 49), the second special display controlled by the sub-control unit. An image display apparatus in which the figure hold display (second first special figure hold display, second second special figure hold display) and second universal figure hold display are also controlled by the sub-control unit. Display (display control) is executed (resumed and restored) earlier than (first image display device 7, second image display device 71, and / or third image display device 72). This is a simple display control in which the main display turns on / off / flashes each single LED, while the image display device (the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and / or the first display device). This is because the three-image display device 72) includes a liquid crystal display unit and has more complicated display control than the main display.

  Thereby, even if it is a display part which shows the special symbol propriety determination result and fluctuation state controlled by the same sub control part, the first sub display part which returns a display promptly after power-on (after power restoration) And a second sub display unit for returning the display after a delay. And according to each role, it becomes possible to perform optimal game control. The first sub display unit includes a second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the fluctuation state display 49) and a second normal symbol display (fluctuation state display 49) controlled by the sub control unit. C3), the second special figure hold indicator (second first special figure hold indicator, second second special figure hold indicator), the second general figure hold indicator, and the simple With the display control, it is possible to easily grasp the fluctuation state and the like, and it is possible to quickly return after the power is turned on again. Further, the second sub display unit corresponds to an image display device (first image display device 7, second image display device 71, and / or third image display device 72) that is also controlled by the sub control unit. In addition, it is possible to display various game information and game effects (reach effect, notice effect, story effect, etc.) with complicated display control, and to improve the taste by various game effects.

  Further, in another aspect, when power is turned off for some reason during a game or during operation of the gaming machine (power is on), if power is supplied again, the sub-control unit The second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the fluctuation state indicator 49), the second normal symbol indicator (c3 of the fluctuation state indicator 49), the second special symbol hold indicator (first 2 first special figure hold indicator, second second special figure hold indicator), the second universal figure hold indicator performs display (display control) first (resume, return), main control unit The first special symbol display (the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b), the first normal symbol display (the normal symbol display 42), the first special symbol, which are display-controlled. Hold indicator (first special figure hold indicator 43a, second special figure hold indicator 43b), first general figure hold indicator (general The hold display device 42) performs display (display control) later (resume, return), and the image display device (first image display device 7, second image display device 71, and / or display control controlled by the sub-control unit) The third image display device 72) may further perform display (display control) after that (restart or return).

  Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described. The present embodiment 2 shows an embodiment of a configuration related to an effect that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment 1 and its effect control. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration of the second embodiment will be mainly described, and the description of the configuration common to the first embodiment will be omitted. In the following, reference numerals and step numbers different from those of the first embodiment are used for configurations different from the first embodiment, and reference numerals, step numbers, and the like same as those of the first embodiment are used for common configurations.

  The various effects described in the second embodiment and the third embodiment to be described later are the control processes (received command analysis process) performed by the sub control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91) as described in the first embodiment. (S4302), variation production start processing (S4404), winning game production processing (S4408), etc.). Therefore, the sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) is also referred to as “production execution means” or “production control means”. In the following, in the first embodiment, the low probability low base state (state A) is also referred to as a “first gaming state”, and the high base state (the low probability high base state and the high probability high base state, That is, the state B) is also referred to as “second gaming state”, the low probability high base state (state B) is also referred to as “low probability and second gaming state”, and the high probability high base state (state B) This is also called “high probability and second gaming state”. In addition, the highly accurate low base state (state C) is also referred to as a “third game state” or a “specific game state”.

[Game production in state A]
The game effects executed in the state A which is the low probability low base state (normal game state) are mainly based on the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination triggered by entering the first start port 20. The effect symbol game effect (variation effect) executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol. As described above, in the state A, “A” or “B” is set as the effect mode. For this reason, the effect symbol game effect in the state A is performed under a situation where a background image or the like (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode A or B is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. In the second embodiment, it is assumed that the setting and transition of the production mode in the state A is automatically performed according to a predetermined mode control condition under the control of the sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91). Yes. For this reason, the player cannot be involved in the setting (transition) of the effect mode in the state A. For example, it may be configured such that the player can arbitrarily select the effect mode in the state A by operating the effect button 63 and the like during the demonstration effect.

  In the state A (effect mode A or B), the effect symbols 8 are “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” symbols made up of blue symbols, and “1”, “5” made up of green symbols. , “9” symbols and red symbols “3” and “7” symbols are displayed. Each of these symbols is displayed by the image control microcomputer 101 reading out the corresponding symbol image data (symbol data) from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displaying it on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. Executed.

  53, when the variation display of the production symbol 8 is started as shown in FIG. 53 (see FIG. 53 (a)), the variation display is basically the second stop mode (see FIG. 53). Left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (see FIG. 53 (b) → (c) → (d), (e) → (f)) Is operated in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 53 (g)). Here, when the left symbol (effect symbol 8L) and the right symbol (effect symbol 8R) stop at the same symbol, reach is established (see FIG. 53 (f)), and thereafter, the middle symbol (effect symbol 8C) displays a variable display. Until it stops, the reach effect is executed by the image display device or the like. The reach effect mainly develops an effect indicating whether the middle symbol (final stop symbol) stops at the same symbol as the previously stopped symbol (whether or not the big hit mode is displayed). The same holds true for states B and C regarding reach establishment and reach production.

  In this way, while the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a discrete pattern (completely broken pattern or reach variable pattern) as a result of the variable display, it is “displaced”. On the other hand, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a big hit mode (double eye) as a result of the variable display, the big hit game can be executed. However, it switches to the jackpot game effect (15R jackpot game effect or 4R jackpot game effect) for the jackpot related to the first special symbol. Then, when the big hit game is “15R first big hit” or “4R second big hit”, the gaming state after the big hit game is the high probability low base state (state C, second gaming state), “ In the case of “4R third big hit”, the gaming state after the big hit game is a highly accurate base state (state B, high probability and second gaming state), and in the case of “4R fourth big hit”, The gaming state after the big hit game ends becomes a low probability and high base state (state B, low probability and second gaming state) (see FIG. 6).

  In state A, the chance eye effect can be executed as a notice effect (special figure 1 reservation pre-reading notice) based on the result of the first special figure hold preliminary determination (S322). Hereinafter, the chance eye effect executed in the state A will be described. The chance chance is a kind of stop display mode (including temporary stop) of the production symbol 8 and is a stop display (temporary stop display or fixed stop) without reaching reach among the detachment modes (non-specific modes). It means a specific stop event that is displayed. An effect in which the specific stop appearance (chance eye) is stopped and displayed is called “chance eye effect”. The chance eye is also referred to as a “special aspect”, and the chance eye effect is also referred to as a “special stop effect”. Furthermore, in the following description, when simply referred to as a stop display, it is possible to grasp either meaning without distinguishing between a temporary stop display and a fixed stop display.

[Chance eye production in state A]
In the state A, when the three symbols constituting the effect symbol 8 (the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are all displayed in the same color (same classification) as the stop event (same color event) Yes. Specifically, red design rosettes (“3,3,7”, “3,7,7”, “7,3,3”, etc.) and green symbols (“1,5,9”) , “1,5,5”, “5,9,1”, etc.), and the blue pattern (“2,4,6”, “4,6,8”, “4,6,6”, etc.) ) Is defined as the chance of state A. Among these chance eyes, the chance eyes composed of red symbols are also called “red chance eyes”, the chance eyes composed of green symbols are also called “green chance eyes”, and are composed of blue symbols. The chance eyes are also called “blue chance eyes”.

  The chance eye effect in state A according to the present embodiment is that when the “red chance eye” appears, the first special figure hold that becomes the execution opportunity of the chance eye effect is “15R first big hit”, “4R second big hit” ”,“ 4R 3rd big hit ”or“ 4R 4th big hit ”has been determined to have the highest probability of being a big hit hold (hit reliability), In order of “eye” and “blue chance eye”, the big hit reliability is determined to be low. In other words, the relationship of the jackpot reliability of each chance is “blue chance eyes” <“green chance eyes” <“red chance eyes”.

  In this embodiment, the chance eyes that may be stopped and displayed in the state A are configured by the “same color pattern combination”, but the configuration of the chance eyes is not limited to this. For example, In the case where a character is attached to the production symbol, chances (all characters, etc.) can be configured according to the character type (friend character, enemy character, etc.).

  The chance eye effect in state A is executed when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied. Specifically, (1) the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed based on the deviation fluctuation pattern “P7” (see FIG. 9), and (2) the special figure 1 holds the number of reserved balls “2”. Corresponds to the number of reserved balls "1" in the special figure 1 in the situation where the off-hold (which is also called "specific off-hold"), which is the trigger for the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation pattern "P4" is stored as the special figure 1 hold The special figure 1 fluctuation associated with the digestion of the special figure 1 hold is executed based on the deviation fluctuation pattern “P7” (see FIG. 9), and (3) the first corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved ball number “2”. Under the condition that the jackpot hold is stored as the special figure hold, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol accompanying the digestion of the first special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 1 hold ball number “1” is released and the fluctuation pattern “P7” ( (See FIG. 9), and satisfy (4) any of the above. When “chance eye notice” is set as the notice effect (notice effect pattern) in the change effect start processing (S4404) when starting the change display of the first special symbol based on the moving pattern “P7” (S4506) A chance eye effect is executed.

  Here, the chance eye effect is performed in a situation where the specified off hold (the out change pattern “P4”) is stored, and the out change pattern “P4” has a long time of 120 seconds (see FIG. 9). This is because, as such a variation effect based on a long-time variation pattern, an effect (for example, a super reach effect, a development effect, etc.) with relatively high jackpot reliability is executed. In addition, the chance hit effect is performed in a situation where the jackpot hold is stored for a comparatively long time of 30 seconds or more in the jackpot fluctuation pattern ("P1" to "P3") (see FIG. 9). This is because, as such a variation effect based on a long-time variation pattern, an effect (for example, a super reach effect, a development effect, etc.) having a relatively high jackpot reliability is executed. In this way, by configuring the fluctuation production based on the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time to be executed through the chance eye production, the player is paid attention to the chance production and the fluctuation production after the chance eye production, so that It is possible to improve the game entertainment interest by encouraging the player's expectation. In addition, when a chance-out effect is executed triggered by the fact that specific off-hold hold or jackpot hold is stored (see (2) or (3) in the above execution condition), the specific off-hold hold or jackpot hold is stored. Since the chance eye effect is executed during the period from when the effect symbol 8 based on the specified off-hold or jackpot hold is displayed (change display of the first special symbol), It becomes possible to improve amusement interest. Note that an effect with relatively high jackpot reliability, such as a super reach effect or a development effect, is also referred to as a “specific effect” or a “specific effect”.

  Of the execution conditions for the chance eye effect, the determination as to whether or not specific off-hold or jackpot hold is stored is made by accessing the effect hold information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 and storing the content (effect hold information). This is done by checking As described above, in the effect hold information storage area (acquisition information storage means), information such as a prior determination result, a hit type, and a variation pattern included in the start ball entering command transmitted from the main control unit 80 is the effect hold information. The stored content (production hold information) matches the storage content (acquisition information) of the special figure hold storage unit (first special figure hold storage unit, second special figure hold storage unit) of the main control unit 80. To do. Therefore, by checking the storage contents (production hold information) in the production hold information storage area, it is possible to determine the pre-determined result of special figure hold that is currently stored.

  Here, the production hold information includes, as described above, special figure 1 production hold information corresponding to the first special figure hold and special figure 2 production hold information corresponding to the second special figure hold. The information storage area includes a special figure 1 production hold information storage area for storing special figure 1 production hold information and a special figure 2 production hold information storage area for storing special figure 2 production hold information. When the production control microcomputer 91 (sub control unit 90) checks the storage status of the special figure hold, the target of the production hold information to be checked depends on the special figure 1 production hold information or the game state at that time. Switch to special figure 2 production hold information. Specifically, when the game state is state A or state B, the special figure 1 production hold information is a check target, and when the game state is state C, the special figure 2 production hold information is a check target. This is because the state A and the state B are gaming states in which the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly performed, and the state C is a gaming state in which the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly performed. Note that the above-mentioned specific off-hold or jackpot hold that triggers the execution of the chance eye effect is also referred to as “specific acquisition information” or “specific acquisition information”.

  The chance eye effect in state A executed under such conditions is executed using a so-called “pseudo-continuous” variation effect (pseudo-continuous effect). Pseudo-continuous (pseudo-continuous production) is a temporary display of temporary display in a stop display mode (predetermined spotted eyes) other than the doublet after the production design 8 is variably displayed during a single variation display of a special design. Then, it is a fluctuating effect that repeats a predetermined number of operations after that the effect symbol 8 is variably displayed again. As described above, the chance eye effect is executed when “chance eye notice” is set at the start of the change effect related to the change display (12-second change) based on the deviation change pattern “P7” (S4506). It is. That is, the chance eye effect is executed with the change effect based on the deviation change pattern “P7”. For this reason, the fluctuation effect based on the deviation fluctuation pattern “P7” accompanied by the chance eye effect (chance eye advance notice) is executed as the “pseudo-continuous effect”. Therefore, the chance eye effect in state A is also a pseudo-continuous effect. In the present embodiment, the effect pattern related to the chance eye effect in the state A includes the effect symbol (stop symbol) which is displayed as a chance item (special aspect) with a stop display (temporary stop and final stop in a pseudo-continuation). Is set by the processing of S4505 and S4506.

  The effect pattern of the chance eye effect in state A (also referred to as “chance eye effect pattern”) is roughly divided into a pattern in which the chance eye stop display count (also referred to as “chance eye stop frequency”) is “twice”, There are four types of patterns: a pattern with a chance stop count of “3 times”, a pattern with a chance stop count of “4 times”, and a pattern with a chance stop count of “5 times”. Further, in each of these effect patterns, the types of chance eyes to be stopped and their appearance order (for example, “blue chance eyes → green chance eyes”, “blue chance eyes → green chance eyes → red chance eyes”, etc.) ) Is defined as a chance eye appearance pattern.

  When the chance eye effect is executed, the first special figure hold pre-determination result (special figure 1 hold pre-read result) and the chance eye effect pattern selection conditions (selection rate) which are the execution trigger are defined. Based on a determination table (not shown), a random number for determining the notice effect, a chance effect effect pattern (including a chance eye appearance pattern) is determined (S4506). As mentioned earlier, the chance of hitting big hits is highest for “red chance eyes”, followed by “green chance eyes” and “blue chance eyes”. The chance eye effect pattern selection conditions (selection rate) are defined in the chance eye effect pattern determination table so that the greater the chance eye stop count, the higher the jackpot reliability. For example, if the first special figure hold that triggers the execution of the chance eye effect is a big hit hold, the selection rate (appearance rate) of the pattern in which the chance eye stop count is “4 times” or more, or the pattern in which the “red chance eye” appears ) Is relatively high, and the selection condition (selection) is selected so that the selection rate (appearance rate) of the pattern where the number of chance eye stoppages is “3 times” or less or the pattern where “red chance eye” does not appear is relatively low Rate). On the other hand, when the first special figure hold that triggers the execution of the chance eye effect is a release hold, a pattern with a chance eye stop count of “3 times” or less or a pattern in which “red chance eye” does not appear The rate (appearance rate) is relatively high, and the selection rate (appearance rate) of patterns with a chance eye stop count of “4 times” or more and patterns with “red chance eye appearance” is relatively low, Selection conditions (selection rate) are determined.

  Here, FIG. 54 shows an example of a chance eye effect production pattern (chance eye performance pattern). In the figure, the chance eye effect patterns with the chance eye stop counts of “4 times” and “5 times” are illustrated. The star (★) in the figure indicates the jackpot reliability of each appearance pattern within the number of times of the first chance stop, and the greater the number of stars, the higher the jackpot reliability. ing. Also, in the figure, “blue” in the chance eye appearance pattern means “blue chance eye”, “green” means “green chance eye”, and “red” means “red chance eye”.

  As shown in FIG. 54, in the chance eye effect pattern of the present embodiment, as the chance eye stop count increases, the type of the chance eye that is stopped and displayed (color in this example) indicates that the big hit reliability is high. It includes things that can change to (color). For example, if the number of chance stops is “5”, the first and second of the five times are “blue chance eyes”, the third and fourth times are “green chance eyes”, and the fifth time is “red chance eyes” "(Blue chance eyes-> blue chance eyes-> green chance eyes-> green chance eyes-> red chance eyes)". By providing a chance eye effect pattern in which the chance eyes are increased in this way, the player is made to pay attention to the number of times the effect design is stopped and displayed at the chance eyes and the type of chance eyes (color in this example) to be stopped, It is possible to increase the expectation for the big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 54, when the chance eye stop count is “4”, the big hit reliability of “blue chance eyes → green chance eyes → red chance eyes → red chance eyes” in the chance eye appearance patterns is The highest hit reliability is the lowest, “Blue chance eyes → Blue chance eyes → Blue chance eyes → Blue chance eyes”. In addition, among the chance eye stop count “5 times”, among the chance eye appearance patterns, “blue chance eyes → green chance eyes → green chance eyes → red chance eyes → red chance eyes” has the highest jackpot reliability, The big hit reliability of “blue chance eyes → blue chance eyes → blue chance eyes → blue chance eyes → blue chance eyes” is the lowest. The relationship between the chance eye stop count, the chance eye appearance pattern, and the jackpot reliability is similarly determined for the chance eye performance patterns with the chance eye stop count of “2 times” and “3 times”. When the chance eye effect is executed, one of the chance eye effect patterns is selected using a chance eye effect pattern determination table (not shown) (S4506).

  Further, in this embodiment, for the chance eye effect based on the chance eye effect pattern with the chance eye stop count of 4 times or more, an effect suggesting how many times the chance eye is stopped and displayed (also referred to as “number of times effect effect”). Are also executed. The number suggestion effect can be said to be a notice effect related to the chance eye effect in that it indicates the number of chance eye stop times. The effect pattern of the number suggestion effect (number suggestion effect pattern) is set according to the effect pattern of the chance eye effect (S4506). The number-of-times suggesting production in this embodiment is started when the first chance is stopped in the chance production, and after the first chance stop, how many chances are there. It is suggested that the display is stopped. In other words, this indicates the number of remaining stop display times for the chance. For this reason, the number suggesting effect pattern indicates that the number of chance stop display times (remaining times) is three times and that the chance number of stop display times (remaining times) is four times. In the case where a chance eye effect pattern with 4 chance chance stops is set, the former number suggestion effect pattern is set, and a chance eye stop pattern with 5 chance eye stop times is set. In the case of being performed, the latter number suggesting effect pattern is set. In this way, the number-of-times-indicating effect is executed together with the chance-of-thinking effect, and the stop-display of the number of chances of the number of times suggested by the number-of-times-indicating effect is executed, so that when the chance eye effect is executed It becomes possible to make the player pay attention to the number of stop display times of chances, enhance the effect of producing the chance eyes, and improve the game entertainment.

  The flow of effects in the case where such a chance eye effect and a frequency suggestion effect are executed will be described with reference to FIG. Here, a case where the conditions (3) and (4) among the execution conditions for the chance eye effect described above are satisfied will be described as an example. That is, the first special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 1 hold ball number “1” is digested under the situation where the big hit hold is stored as the first special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 1 hold ball number “2”. The special figure 1 reserve ball number is changed from “2” to “1”, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol related to the digestion is executed based on the deviation fluctuation pattern “P7”, and based on this deviation fluctuation pattern “P7”. A case where a chance eye effect and a frequency suggestion effect are executed as a variable effect will be described as an example. Also, as an example of the chance eye production pattern, the chance eye stop count is 5 times, and the chance eye appearance pattern is “blue chance eye → green chance eye → green chance eye → red chance eye → red chance eye” as an example. To do. In FIG. 55, the first effect hold 9a corresponding to the first special figure hold (big hit hold) that becomes the trigger for the chance eye effect is indicated by a black circle (●), and the chance eye effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is shown. The first production hold 9a corresponding to the first special figure hold (off hold) to be executed is indicated by a white circle (◯).

  FIG. 55A shows the first special figure hold (big hit hold) corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved ball number “2”, which is an execution opportunity of the chance eye effect (and the number suggestion effect), and the chance eye effect (and the number of times). The first special figure hold (disengagement hold) corresponding to the number of special figure 1 hold balls “1” on which the suggestion effect is executed is stored, and the first special figure hold digestion associated with the earliest first special figure hold digestion is stored. The display content of the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) when the special figure fluctuation (fluctuation effect) ends is shown. FIG. 55 shows the minimum display contents necessary for explaining the outline of the chance eye effect and the frequency suggestion effect, and the other effect images such as the background and characters that can be displayed in the variable effect are illustrated. Omitted.

  When the first special figure hold (release hold) corresponding to the special figure 1 hold ball number “1” in which the chance eye effect is executed is digested from the state of FIG. 55 (A), it is shown in FIG. 55 (B). In this way, the variation display of the effect design 8 is started, and the display position of the first effect hold 9a is shifted to the right. Then, after a while from the start of the change display (the change effect), the blue chance eye is stopped and displayed as the first chance stop as shown in FIG. The first chance stop is the first temporary stop in the pseudo-ream related to the variation effect, and the blue chance eye is displayed until a predetermined temporary stop time (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. The When the chance eye is stopped (temporarily stopped), the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped (temporarily stopped) almost simultaneously.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the chance eye is stopped and displayed, in order to appeal the player to the chance eye stop display, the effect image E that colors the chance eye that is stopped and displayed is displayed on the effect symbol 8 that is stopped and displayed. While displaying in the surroundings (see FIGS. 55C, 55E, etc.), a predetermined chance stop sound is output from the speaker 67. The display of the effect image E and the output of the chance stop sound are also referred to as “effect production”. In this way, by displaying the effect image E or outputting the chance eye stop sound in accordance with the chance eye stop display, the player pays attention to the chance eye stop display, and the effect of the chance eye stop is produced. It becomes possible to raise. In addition, the aspect of the effect production performed according to the stop display of the chance is not limited to the present embodiment. For example, the lighting provided on the game board or the front frame emits light, or the movable role It is possible to adopt various modes such as actuating an object. Also, one or more of a display effect by an image display device, a light effect by an electric decoration member such as a panel lamp or a frame lamp, a sound effect by a speaker, and a movable effect by a movable decorative member (movable accessory, gimmick) An effect effect can be performed using an effect (effect device).

  After the first chance stop, when the effect design 8 resumes the variable display as shown in FIG. 55 (D), the number-of-times suggestion image K that suggests how many times the chance eyes are stopped is displayed. 7a is displayed at a predetermined display position. The number-of-times suggestion image K is configured to include a number indicating the remaining number of times that the chance eye is stopped and displayed, and the display is started in accordance with the start (restart) of the variable display of the effect symbol 8, and the next chance It disappears from the screen before the eyes are stopped. The effect of temporarily displaying the number suggestion image K in this way is the number suggestion effect.

  In FIG. 55D, the number suggestion image K displays the number “4”, suggesting that there are four more chance stops. Therefore, for the player, it is recognized through the display of the number suggestion image K (number suggestion effect) that the fourth chance stop display indicated by the number suggestion image K is performed before the end of the variation effect. can do. In addition, at the time when the first number suggestion image K is displayed (at the time of FIG. 55D), a total of five chance stoppages including the four times indicated by the number suggestion image K are the variation effects. It will be clear to the player that this is done.

  In the present embodiment, as the number suggestion effect, a sound indicating the chance stop remaining display count to the player is output along with the display of the number suggestion image K. For this reason, the player can recognize the number of stop displays of chances not only visually but also by hearing.

  After the first chance stop, the re-variable display (pseudo 2) of the effect symbol 8 and the number suggestion effect are performed, and when the number suggestion image K is deleted from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 55 (E). In addition, the green chance eye is stopped and displayed as the second chance stop. At this time, as in the first chance stop, the effect presentation at the chance stop is executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 55 (F) to 55 (K), the re-change display of the effect symbol 8 (pseudo 3 to pseudo 5), the display of the number suggestion image K (number suggestion effect), and the chance eye stop (third time to The fifth time) is performed in the same manner. Then, the fifth chance stop (the fourth chance stop after displaying the first number suggestion image K) is the final stop of the effect design 8 in the variation effect, and with the fifth chance stop, The variation production ends. In this way, the chance eye effect and the number suggestion effect are executed in the change effect (12-second change) based on the deviation change pattern “P7”.

  After this, when the first special figure hold (here, the big hit hold) that triggered the chance eye effect is digested, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started as shown in FIG. 55 (L), The display position of the first effect hold 9a is shifted to the right. Since the variation effect is based on the jackpot hold, the reach is established as shown in FIG. 55 (M) after the start of the variation display, and the reach effect is advanced. Thereafter, a specific effect (super reach effect, development effect, etc.) with a relatively high jackpot reliability is executed, and finally the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed in a big hit mode (horizontal), and the big hit is determined.

  The above is the outline of the chance eye effect in the state A, but in the chance eye effect of the present example, the frequency suggestion effect is also performed by displaying the frequency suggestion image K and outputting the remaining stop display frequency. In this number suggestion effect, the number of times to suggest (remaining number of times) decreases by one each time the chance item is stopped and displayed in the chance eye effect (FIGS. 55D to 55F). (See (H)-(J)). In other words, the number suggestion effect is executed as a countdown effect for counting down the remaining number of stop displays for the chance. And the chance eye stop for the number of times counted down by the countdown effect is executed. Furthermore, after the end of the variation effect in which the chance eye effect is executed, a specific effect with a relatively high jackpot reliability is executed. For this reason, the countdown effect (number-suggested effect) executed together with the chance eye effect is an effect that indicates the remaining stop display count of the chance eye by countdown, and an effect that indicates the remaining period until the specific effect is started by countdown. There is also. Thereby, it becomes possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the number of times that the design symbol 8 is stopped and displayed at the chance eye in the chance eye effect, and the player's feelings can be enhanced as the chance eye effect progresses. It becomes possible.

  In addition, the aspect of the number suggestion effect performed together with the chance eye effect is not limited to the present embodiment, and for example, an electrical decoration provided on the game board or the front frame corresponds to the number of stop indications of the chance eye. It is possible to adopt various modes such as blinking at the number of times to be operated or operating the movable accessory at the number of times. In addition, one or more of a display effect by an image display device, a light effect by an electric decoration member such as a panel lamp or a frame lamp, a sound effect by a speaker, and a movable effect by a movable decorative member (movable accessory, gimmick) The number suggestion effect can be performed using the effect (effect device). Further, in the present embodiment, the execution of the number suggestion effect is started when the first chance stop is performed, but before the first chance stop is performed, the execution of the number suggestion effect is performed. It may be started. In this case, for example, when a chance eye effect is executed based on a chance eye effect pattern with five chance eye stop times in a certain variation effect, the number “5” is displayed along with the start of the variation effect. The number suggestion effect can be performed by displaying the number suggestion image K on the display screen and thereafter decreasing the number of the number suggestion image K by one each time the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed at the chance. The display position of the number suggestion image K may not be on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, but may be on the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 or on the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72. And can be. In this case, the number-of-times suggestion image K can be displayed on one or both of the display screen 71a and the display screen 72a. Or it is also possible to display the number-of-times suggestion image K on all of the display screen 7a, the display screen 71a, and the display screen 72a. In this way, by displaying the number suggestion image K on the three display screens and performing the number suggestion effect, the player's attention is given to the chance eye effect and the frequency suggestion effect (the number of times the effect design 8 is stopped and displayed at the chance time). Can be collected more easily, and it becomes possible to improve amusement interest.

  The chance eye effect described above is an example in which the conditions (3) and (4) among the execution conditions of the above-mentioned chance eye effect are satisfied, but the above-mentioned (1) and (4) Even when the conditions (2) and (4) are satisfied, the chance eye effect is executed in the same manner as the flow shown in FIG. However, when the chance eye effect is executed while satisfying the conditions of (1) and (4), the next change is made after the end of the change effect based on the deviation change pattern “P7” in which the chance eye effect is executed. A specific effect such as a reach effect or a development effect is not always executed.

[Select Resident Image]
Further, in the state A, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a state where a demonstration for waiting for a customer is executed (also referred to as “customer waiting state” or “demo state”), identification information (a special symbol and / or effect) The second image display provided on the left and right upper parts (both left and right outside the game area) of the front frame 51 when the player inputs a selection instruction by operating a predetermined input means during the variable display of the symbols) An effect image (also referred to as “resident image”) that is normally displayed on one or both of the device 71 and the third image display device 72 can be arbitrarily selected from a plurality of types of images prepared in advance. It is configured. And when the above-mentioned specific effect (specific effect) is performed as effect design game effect (variation effect), it is comprised so that a specific effect can be performed with the content reflecting the selection result. Hereinafter, the selection of the resident image by the player and the specific effect reflecting the selection result will be described.

  In the following, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 provided on the left and right upper portions of the front frame 51 (on the left and right sides outside the game area) are collectively referred to as “sub liquid crystal”. The display device 71 is also referred to as “left sub liquid crystal”, and the third image display device 72 is also referred to as “right sub liquid crystal”. Further, the image display device 7 provided in the approximate center (in the game area) of the game board 2 (game area 3) is also referred to as “main liquid crystal”. In the following example, it is assumed that a resident image is displayed on the left sub-liquid crystal (display screen 71a).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of characters having a singer motif are set as characters appearing in a game effect executed by the image display device, and images (characters) representing the respective characters (persons) Image data) is provided as a resident image. Specifically, as the character, each of male characters B1 to B5, each of which is a male group member (member) composed of five male singers, and a female group composed of five female singers Female characters L1 to L5 having (member) as a motif are set. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a waiting state for a customer, or when the effect symbol 63 is being displayed (change effect is being displayed) and the effect (button effect) using the effect button 63 is not being performed, When the first effect button 63a is operated (pressed), a menu screen (not shown) for setting (customizing) the effect environment of the gaming machine 1 is displayed on the display screen 71a of the left sub-liquid crystal.

  Here, the production environment executes various productions such as the brightness of the display screen, the volume of the sound effect, the brightness of the illumination, whether or not to hold the hold-ahead preview, and the reliability of the jackpot reliability of the specific announcement or reach production. It defines the conditions. In the menu screen for setting such a production environment, multiple items of the production environment that can be set are displayed, and the player can select an item to be set (customized) from the items displayed on the menu screen. It is possible to select and perform desired setting (customization) for the selected item. The processing related to the display of the menu screen based on the operation (pressing) of the first effect button 63a is performed in the 10 ms timer interruption process (S4010) by the effect control microcomputer 91.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the effect button 63, an operation lever (not shown) for inputting an operation signal (operation detection switch detection signal) to the sub-control board 90 is provided around the upper plate 61 of the front frame 51. Is provided. This operation lever functions as an input means for the player to input as with the effect button 63. Selection / setting input related to the production environment through the above-described menu screen can be performed by operating this operation lever.

  On the above-mentioned menu screen, an item (character selection) for instructing to accept selection of a character (also referred to as “resident character”) that is normally displayed on the sub liquid crystal is displayed as one of the items of the setting environment that can be set. Is done. When this character selection item is selected, the character selection process (S4306) shown in FIG. 56 is executed by the effect control microcomputer 91, whereby the selection of the resident character can be accepted.

  As shown in FIG. 56, in the character selection process (S4306), first, the character selection screen G1 is displayed on the display screen 71a of the left sub-liquid crystal (S5001). For the display of the character selection screen G1, a command for instructing the display start of the screen is transmitted to the image control board 100, and the CPU (image control microcomputer 101) of the image control board 100 that has received the command corresponds from the image ROM. This is done by reading out the image data and displaying it on the display screen 71a.

  Here, an example of the character selection screen G1 displayed on the left sub liquid crystal display screen 71a is shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the character display screen G1 is provided with an information display area S extending in the left-right direction below. In the information display area S, character information (plural types of effect information) corresponding to each of the male characters B1 to B5 and the female characters L1 to L5 is displayed. Specifically, information (a plurality of types of effect information) indicating names (names) and faces is displayed for all the male characters B1 to B5 and the female characters L1 to L5. In the present embodiment, among all the male characters B1 to B5 and female characters L1 to L5, character information corresponding to three characters is displayed and visible, and the type of character information that can be visually recognized is the operation type. It can be changed by operating the lever. That is, in the information display area S, by operating the operating lever to tilt in either the left or right direction, the character information displayed there is in the same direction (left or right) as the tilting direction of the operating lever. It is designed to scroll. Thereby, it displays so that each character information can be visually recognized about all the characters of male character B1-B5 and female character L1-L5. Then, one character information displayed in the center in the left-right direction in the information display area S becomes character information to be selected, and a character image CG1 corresponding to the character information to be selected is displayed above the information display area S (character It is displayed on the selection screen G1 (approximately the center of the selection screen G1) (in FIG. 57A, the male character B1 is scheduled to be selected). The type of the character image CG1 displayed at the approximate center of the screen is changed in conjunction with the scroll display of the character information in the information display area S. Thus, on the character selection screen G1, the character information (plural types of effect information) corresponding to each of the male characters B1 to B5 and the female characters L1 to L5 can be selected based on the operation of the operation lever (input means). Is displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 56, in S5002 following S5001, it is determined whether or not there is an instruction input (scroll instruction input) for scrolling and displaying the character information displayed in the information display area S (S5002). This scroll instruction input is generated by inputting a detection signal (operation signal) to the sub-control board 90 when the operation lever is tilted in either the left or right direction as described above. If it is determined in S5002 that there is a scroll instruction input (YES in S5002), the character information displayed in the information display area S is scroll-displayed in the same direction (left or right) as the tilting direction of the operation lever. (S5003) This scroll display is executed by display control of the CPU (image control microcomputer 101) of the image control board 100 which has received a command for instructing the scroll display from the sub-control board 90. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5002 that there is no scroll instruction input (NO in S5002), the process proceeds to S5004 without performing S5003.

  Next, in S5004, it is determined whether or not there is an instruction input for confirming the resident character (character confirmation instruction input) (S5004). Here, the operation lever is integrally provided with a push button (not shown) that can be pressed, and when the push button is pressed, a detection signal (operation signal) is sent to the sub-control board 90. It is supposed to be entered. The character confirmation instruction input is generated when a detection signal (operation signal) of the push button is input to the sub-control board 90.

  If it is determined in S5004 that there is a character confirmation instruction input (YES in S5004), the character information displayed at the center of the information display area S at that time is the character information (“resident character”) of the resident character (resident image). The selection is accepted as being selected as "information" (S5005). The received character information is stored as resident character information in a predetermined area (resident character information storage area) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S5006), and the display of the character selection screen G1 is finished to select the resident character. A resident character determination screen G2 showing the result is displayed on the display screen 71a (S5007), and the character selection process (S4306) is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5004 that there is no character confirmation instruction input (NO in S5004), the character selection process (S4306) is terminated without performing the processes in S5005 to S5007.

  The display of the resident character determination screen G2 by S5007 is performed by transmitting a command for instructing display start of the screen to the image control board 100, and the CPU (image control microcomputer 101) of the image control board 100 receiving the command receives the image ROM. The corresponding image data is read out from the image data and displayed on the display screen 71a. As shown in FIG. 57 (b), the character image CG2 (corresponding image) corresponding to the resident character information whose selection has been accepted in S5005 is displayed on the resident character determination screen G2. This character image CG2 is a resident character determination notification image. FIG. 57B shows a case where the male character B1 is selected as the resident character. The player can confirm through the resident character determination screen G2 which character information (effect information) has been accepted (selected) as resident character information (resident character information).

  The display of the resident character determination screen G2 (character image CG2) automatically ends when about 5 seconds have elapsed from the start. Thereafter, the above-described menu screen is displayed again on the display screen 71a of the left sub-liquid crystal, and in this state, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses without input relating to item selection, or the player By operating the operation lever and inputting a predetermined end instruction, the display of the menu screen is ended.

  When the resident character is selected in this manner and the display of the menu screen is completed, the character image corresponding to the resident character information (effect information) stored in S5006 is displayed on the display screen 71a of the left sub-liquid crystal, that is, A character image (corresponding image) corresponding to the character information (effect information) received in S5005 is displayed as a resident image. Although illustration of this display content is omitted, on the display screen 71a of the left sub-liquid crystal, a character image corresponding to one selected as a resident character among the male characters B1 to B5 and the female characters L1 to L5 has a background. Is displayed. For this reason, the player can check which character (character information) is currently selected as the resident character (resident character information) through the character image displayed on the display screen 71a.

  Then, while the resident character (resident image) is displayed on the left sub-liquid crystal (display screen 71a), the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a) displays the effect display related to the effect symbol game effect (variation effect) (change of effect symbol 8). Display, the above-mentioned chance eye effect, etc.) are performed. Under these circumstances, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a specific effect accompanied by the display of the effect image corresponding to the type (classification) of the character displayed as the resident character and the output of the music corresponding to this. Hereinafter, the content of the specific effect will be described.

[Contents of specific production]
As described above, the effect symbol game effect (variation effect) is determined mainly based on the change pattern designation command from the main control unit 80, and is executed based on the effect pattern (S4404 etc.). reference). The variation pattern designation command includes information (variation pattern information) indicating the variation pattern related to the variation display of the special symbol. The variation pattern is selected when the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is out of place. Fluctuation pattern (also referred to as “first fluctuation pattern”) is likely to be selected in the case of a big hit (in other words, Variation pattern (also referred to as “second variation pattern”) that is unlikely to be selected in the case of deviation. For example, among the variation patterns shown in FIG. 9, “P1” to “P11” exist in the variation patterns related to the first special symbol which is mainly variably displayed in the state A. Among these, for example, the fluctuation pattern (P1, P4) of 120 seconds with the longest fluctuation time is highly likely to be selected when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit (P1), and in the case of a deviation The possibility of being selected is low (P4). On the other hand, the variation pattern (P7) with a variation time of 12 seconds and the variation pattern (P11) with a variation of 4 seconds are not likely to be selected when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit, and is out of place. There is a possibility of being selected. From this, it can be said that the variation patterns “P7” and “P11” belong to the first variation pattern described above, and the variation patterns “P1” and “P4” belong to the second variation pattern described above.

  When a variation effect based on the variation pattern “P1” or “P4” is executed, such as a super reach effect or a development effect that is not executed in the variation effect based on the variation pattern “P7” or “P11” whose variation time is relatively short. There is a possibility that the specific effect (specific effect) is executed with the variation effect. That is, a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern “P1” or “P4” is transmitted from the main control unit 80, and based on this, the sub control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) performs the above-described variation effect start processing ( When the variation effect pattern is set in S4505 of S4404), the variation effect pattern including the specific effect is set in S4505. A plurality of specific variation effect patterns are provided in advance as a variation effect pattern including this specific effect (also referred to as “specific variation effect pattern”), and a plurality of specific variations are determined based on the variation effect pattern determination table set in S4504. When a specific variation effect pattern (also referred to as “special specific variation effect pattern”) is selected from among the effect patterns, it is displayed on the effect image corresponding to the current resident character (resident character information) and the music corresponding to it A variable effect including a specific effect (in this case, a super reach effect) is output.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the characters appearing in the game production are composed of male characters B1 to B5, each of which is a male group composed of five male singers, and five female singers. Female characters L1 to L5, each having a female group as a motif, are set, and the player can arbitrarily select a resident character from the female characters L1 to L5. This selection result is reflected in the variation effect (specific effect) based on the special specific variation effect pattern.

  In the present embodiment, as the specific effect for the variation effect based on the special specific variation effect pattern, the specific effect (also referred to as “first specific effect”) in which the video and music of the male group to which the male characters B1 to B5 belong is reproduced. And a specific effect (also referred to as “second specific effect”) in which the video and music of the female group to which the female characters L1 to L5 belong are provided, and the first specific effect and the second specific effect are further provided. Are provided with a plurality of types of specific effects, each having a different video and music. Specifically, as a plurality of types of first specific effects, a first specific effect A in which video A and music A are reproduced, a first specific effect B in which video B and music B are reproduced, and video C and music C are reproduced. A first specific effect C is provided. Further, as the plurality of types of second specific effects, the second specific effect D in which the video D and the music D are reproduced, the second specific effect E in which the video E and the music E are reproduced, and the video F and the music F are reproduced. A second specific effect F is provided.

  In the above-described S4505, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the resident character information stored in the above S5006 and is currently selected when setting the special specific variation effect pattern as the change effect pattern related to the current change display. Identify resident characters that are (accepted). Then, a specific effect corresponding to the group to which the specified resident character belongs (in this example, a male group or a female group) is selected, and a special specific variation effect pattern including the selected specific effect is set (S4505).

  For example, when the currently selected resident character is the male character B1, any one of the first specific effects A to C is determined based on the first special symbol determination result or the lottery result using the random effect pattern random number. And a special specific variation effect pattern including the selected first specific effect is set. When the currently selected resident character is the female character L2, any one of the second specific effects D to F is determined based on the first special symbol determination result, the lottery result using the random effect pattern random number, or the like. And a special specific variation effect pattern including the selected second specific effect is set.

  When a change effect start command for starting a change effect based on the special specified change effect pattern set in this way is transmitted to the image control board 100, the image control microcomputer 101 is specified based on the change effect start command. The image data corresponding to the special specific variation effect pattern is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the effect image based on the read image data is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal. In accordance with this, the production control microcomputer 91 reads out music data corresponding to the special specific fluctuation production pattern, and the music by the read music data is sent to the speaker 67 (predetermined output) via the audio control board 106. Part). As a result, when a specific effect (in this case, a super reach effect) is executed in a variation effect based on the special specific variation effect pattern, the character information (effect information) whose selection has been accepted by the above-described character selection process (S4306). A corresponding effect image (video) is displayed on the display screen 7a, music corresponding to the character information (effect information) is output from the speaker 67, and an effect reflecting the selection result by the player is developed. Become. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the specific effect when the specific effect is executed as the variable effect, and to improve the game entertainment interest.

In particular, in this embodiment, the specific effect that can reflect the selection result of the character selection process (S4306) described above is highly likely to be selected in the case of a big hit, and may be selected in the case of a loss. Since it is an effect that is executed with a variation effect based on a low variation pattern (second variation pattern), it is possible to execute an effect that increases the expectation for the big hit in a manner that reflects the selection result by the player It has become. Thereby, it is possible to easily attract the player's attention to the specific effect, and it is possible to further enhance the preference of the specific effect.
Further, when selecting the resident character, the character selection screen G1 is displayed on the display screen 71a of the left sub-liquid crystal, and information on the character to be selected (character information, production information) is displayed there, while reflecting the selection result. The effect image related to the specific effect is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal having a larger screen size than the display screen 71a of the left sub-liquid crystal. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the effect of the effect produced when the specific effect reflecting the result of selection by the player is executed.

  It is also possible to set the big hit reliability for each of the first specific effects A to C and the second specific effects D to F. That is, for each of the first specific effects A to C and the second specific effects D to F, the selection rate selected when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit and the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination are For example, in the first specific effects A to C, the selection ratio selected in the case of losing is set in consideration of the jackpot reliability, for example, the first specific effect A, the first specific effect B, the first specific The big hit reliability increases in the order of the production C, and the second big production reliability increases in the order of the second specific production D, the second specific production E, and the second specific production F in the second specific productions D to F. can do. Alternatively, the level of jackpot reliability can be set through the first specific effects A to C and the second specific effects D to F. That is, a plurality of types of effect images and music corresponding to the character information (effect information) whose selection has been received by the character selection process (S4306) described above are provided, and any one of the plurality of types of effect images and music is provided. When displayed and output, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the displayed and output effect image and the type of music. Thereby, it is possible to further increase the degree of attention of the player with respect to the specific effect, and to further enhance the preference of the specific effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, as characters appearing in the game production, male characters B1 to B5, each of which is a male group composed of five male singers, and a female group composed of five female singers. Female characters L1 to L5 with each person as a motif are set, and character information (plural types of effect information) corresponding to each of these characters is displayed so that the player can select from among them. A person can receive selection of desired character information (resident character information, presentation information). In addition to a character with a singer as a motif, for example, it can be a character with a character of another field such as sports or art as a motif. It can also be a character with a motif of an animal or an anime character. Furthermore, in addition to the character, for example, an item having a motif of jewelry, precious metal, or the like can be used. In other words, various elements (effect elements) constituting the effect, such as characters, items, songs, and backgrounds that can be set as appearing in the game effect, are selected, and multiple types of effect information (item names) , The title of the music, etc.) can be displayed so that the player can select the desired production information.

  In addition, as a specific effect capable of reflecting the selection result obtained by the character selection process (S4306), a button effect that generates a predetermined effect (operation-related effect) based on the operation of the effect button is included. It is also possible to change the execution mode of the button effect for each type of character (effect information) displayed to be selectable on the screen G1. For example, depending on the type of character to be selected, the type of effect button to be operated (first effect button, second effect button, operation lever, etc.) is determined, or the operation mode of the effect button (single press, repeated hits, Long press, rotation, etc.), the type of operation corresponding effects (effect contents) based on the operation of the effect buttons, etc., and the types of effect buttons (operation means, input means) to be operated It is possible to vary the contents of the operation mode and further the effect based on the operation (operation corresponding effect) according to the type of the selected (selectable) character (effect information). In this way, it is possible to enhance the preference of the effect using the effect button (button effect).

[Game production in state B]
The game effects executed in the state B of the low probability high base state (low probability and second gaming state) or the high probability high base state (high probability and second gaming state) are mainly the second start port 21. This is an effect symbol game effect (variation effect) performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, based on the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination triggered by entering the ball. As described above, in state B, “E” is set as the effect mode. For this reason, the effect symbol game effect in the state B is performed under a situation in which screen elements corresponding to the effect mode E are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the effect mode E, a variation count image (not shown) indicating the number of remaining variations of the special symbol until the high base state ends is displayed on a predetermined portion (for example, the upper center of the screen) of the display screen 7a. The remaining number of fluctuations indicated by the fluctuation count image is displayed with an initial value of 100, which is the maximum continuation number of the low-accuracy base state, and is subtracted once each time a special symbol fluctuation display is performed. . The initial value is set to 100 times regardless of whether the production mode E is in the low probability high base state (low probability and second gaming state) or the high probability high base state (high probability and second gaming state) This is because the high base state (second gaming state) is continued until the big hit is generated until the variable display is performed at least 100 times. In addition, the production mode E is a gaming state non-notification mode, and it is determined whether the gaming state (state B) is a low-accuracy high-base state or a high-accuracy high-base state until at least 100 fluctuation displays are performed. This is because it is necessary to make it difficult (impossible) to discriminate through the production.

  And if the variation display of the special symbol is performed 100 times without generating a big hit in the effect mode E (state B), if the gaming state (state B) related to the effect mode E is the low probability and high base state, The low-accuracy / base state ends with the 100th variation display, the gaming state shifts to the low-accuracy / low-base state, and the effect mode shifts from “E” to “A” or “B”. On the other hand, if the gaming state (state B) related to the production mode E is the high-accuracy base state, the high-accuracy base state and the production mode E are continued after the 101st time. In this way, when the production mode E continues after the 101st time, the display mode of the variation count image is a special mode (for example, an image composed of “infinity” characters and “∞” symbols) indicating the remaining number of variations “infinite”. Is displayed.

  In this embodiment, the setting of the production mode E is automatically performed with the transition to the state B under the control of the sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91). In addition, since the state B is a gaming state that is basically played in a right-handed game, in the effect mode E, a right-handed instruction image M instructing a right-handed game is displayed on a predetermined part (for example, the upper right of the screen). Is displayed (see FIG. 58).

  In state B (effect mode E), as the effect symbols 8, the symbols “2”, “6”, “8” consisting of blue symbols, and the symbols “1”, “4”, “9” consisting of green symbols. Then, symbols “3”, “5”, and “7” made up of red symbols are displayed. Each of these symbols is displayed by the image control microcomputer 101 reading out the corresponding symbol image data (symbol data) from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displaying it on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. Executed. In the present embodiment, the state (design) of the effect symbol 8 is different between the state A and the state B. Note that the state (design) of the effect symbol 8 may be the same between the state A and the state B.

  Here, the screen configuration of the display screen 7a in the state B (effect mode E) will be described. As shown in FIG. 58, the display screen 7a in the state B (effect mode E) mainly includes an effect symbol display area 7b, a notice display area 9h, a first effect hold display area 9c, and the variable hold display area. 9e. Each of these display areas (screen constituent elements) is a microcomputer for image control when the game state shifts to state B (and is set) and the variable display of the first special symbol (and effect symbol) can be executed. 101 reads out the image data (screen configuration data for state B) constituting the display screen of state B (effect mode E) from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displays it on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. As a result, it appears (is set) on the display screen 7a.

  In FIG. 58, the effect symbol display area 7b and the boundary between the first effect hold display area 9c and the notice display area 9h are indicated by broken lines, but this is shown as such for convenience of explanation. Actually, no broken line appears on the screen (the same applies to other figures). Further, the solid line portion indicating the notice display area 9h may be either actually displayed on the screen or may not be displayed. In this embodiment, a decorative frame is provided so that the player can visually recognize it. (The same applies to other figures). Further, although not shown in FIG. 58, as described above, a special symbol until the high base state ends is displayed at a predetermined portion (for example, the upper center of the screen) of the display screen 7 a in the state B (effect mode E). A variation count image indicating the number of remaining variations is displayed.

  Among the display screens 7a in the state B, the first effect hold display area 9c and the variable hold display area 9e located at the bottom of the screen include the first special figure hold storage unit (and / or as the acquisition information storage means) described above. The first effect hold 9a ("memory display" or "first memory display" indicating that the first special figure hold (and / or special figure 1 effect hold information) is stored in the special figure 1 effect hold information storage area) ”) And the production hold 9f (“ fluctuation memory display ”or“ first variation ”corresponding to the first special figure hold (first acquisition information) that triggered the currently executed change display (the change). "Also called" memory display ") can be displayed. In the following description, the first effect hold 9a and the effect hold 9f may be simply referred to as “effect hold”.

  The first effect hold display area 9c is divided into four areas corresponding to each of the special figure 1 hold ball numbers “1” to “4”, and the special figure 1 hold from the left side to the right side in FIG. The number of balls “4” (also simply referred to as “hold 4”), the special figure 1 reserved ball number “3” (also referred to simply as “hold 3”), the special figure 1 reserved ball number “2” (also referred to simply as “hold 2”) Each area is arranged in the order of the special figure 1 reserved ball number “1” (also simply referred to as “hold 1”). In the present embodiment, the number of reserved figure 1 reserved balls decreases from the left side to the right side of the display screen 7a, but on the contrary, the special figure from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a. It is good also as the line which 1 reservation ball number decreases. Note that the special figure 1 holding ball number “0” is also referred to as “hold 0”. The variable hold display area 9e is provided adjacent to the right side of the area corresponding to “hold 1” of the first effect hold display area 9c. The part (area) on the display screen 7a in which the first effect hold display area 9c and the change hold display area 9e are provided is also referred to as a “first display unit”.

  A notice display area 9h is provided above the first effect hold display area 9c and the change hold display area 9e (directly above in this example). The notice display area 9h includes four areas of the first effect hold display area 9c, that is, four areas corresponding to each of the special figure 1 hold ball numbers “1” to “4”, and the change hold display area 9e. It is divided into a total of five areas with one corresponding area. In the notice display area 9h, a notice effect (special figure 1 reservation pre-reading notice) based on the result of the prior determination (S322) of the first special figure hold (first acquisition information) can be displayed. Specifically, for example, in the state where the first effect hold 9a is displayed in all of the “hold 1” to “hold 4” in the first effect hold display area 9c, the special figure 1 corresponding to “hold 3” is displayed. When the hold pre-reading notice is executed, the position (area) of the notice display area 9h immediately above the first effect hold display area 9c where the first effect hold 9a corresponding to “hold 3” is displayed. A notice image relating to the hold prefetch notice is displayed. In addition, when the first special figure hold (also referred to as “hold notice target hold”), which is the display target of the notice image (subject to the pre-read notice), is digested and the corresponding variable display is started, the notice image Is displayed at a position (area) immediately above the change hold display area 9e in the notice display area 9h. That is, the notice image regarding the first special figure hold (first acquisition information) that triggered the change display (the change) of the first special symbol being executed is immediately above the change hold display area 9e (the notice display area). 9h). The “notice image” displayed in the notice display area 9h in this way is also called “notice display”, and the part (area) on the display screen 7a where the notice display area 9h is provided is the “second display portion”. Also called. Details of the special figure 1 reservation pre-reading notice using the notice display area 9h will be described later.

  An effect symbol display area 7b is provided above the notice display area 9h (directly above in this example). In the effect symbol display area 7b, the effect symbol 8 (8L, 8C, 8R) can be displayed, and the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is synchronized with the variation display of the first special symbol executed in the state B. Is executable. The effect symbol display area 7b in this state B has a smaller area size than the notice display area 9h. In other words, the notice display area 9h is configured to be larger than the effect symbol display area 7b. This is because the display contents of the notice display area 9h, that is, the display of the notice image in the notice display area 9h is highlighted and the player is noticed in the notice display area 9h even during the variation display of the effect symbol 8 (during the variation effect). This is because such a screen configuration makes it possible to enhance the gaming fun of the state B.

  The magnitude relation between the notice display area 9h and the effect symbol display area 7b is maintained until at least reach is established in the variable display (variation effect) of the effect symbol 8 in the effect symbol display area 7b. The magnitude relationship is maintained during normal fluctuation. Then, after the reach is established, a specific effect such as a super reach effect or a development effect is executed (started), and an effect display related to the specific effect is displayed on substantially the entire display screen 7a, thereby the display screen 7a. The display content (screen configuration) is switched to the effect display related to the specific effect. That is, the magnitude relationship between the notice display area 9h and the effect symbol display area 7b is canceled when the specific effect is executed (started). Such a part (area) on the display screen 7a where the effect symbol display area 7b is provided is also referred to as a “third display portion”.

  Note that the display content (screen configuration) of the display screen 7a in the state B is not limited to that of the present embodiment shown in FIG. Part), the variable hold display area 9e (first display part), the notice display area 9h (second display part) and the effect symbol display area 7b (third display part) may be used. The position and size of each region are not particularly limited.

  Next, display contents (display format) of the first presentation hold display area 9c and the change hold display area 9e (first display unit) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in (b) to (e) in the figure, the positions (areas) corresponding to each of the “hold 1” to “hold 4” of the first effect hold display area 9c are the “hold 1” to “ A first effect hold 9a representing a number corresponding to each of “Take 4” is displayed. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is “0” (in the case of “Hold 0”), as shown in FIG. 5A, the position corresponding to any of “Hold 1” to “Hold 4”. In addition, the first effect hold 9a is not displayed.

,
Under this premise, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), the game ball enters the second starting port 21 (variable starting port) in the state of "holding 0" (see Fig. 1 starting entering ball). When the variable display of the first special symbol is started or the first special symbol hold corresponding to the first special symbol is digested in the state of “Hold 1” and the variable display of the first special symbol is started ( In the case of “hold 1” → “hold 0”), the production hold 9f is displayed in the change hold display area 9e. The effect hold 9f displayed in the change hold display area 9e is erased by the end of the change display (the change) of the first special symbol corresponding thereto.

  In addition, when the first special symbol (and effect symbol 8) is being displayed in a variation state, and the special figure 1 start ball is generated in the state of “Take 0” and becomes “Take 1” (“Take 0” → “ 59), the first effect hold 9a is displayed at a position corresponding to “hold 1” in the first effect hold display area 9c. In the following, when a special figure 1 start ball is generated in the state of “Take 1” and becomes “Take 2” (in the case of “Take 1” → “Take 2”), a special figure is put in the state of “Take 2”. When 1 start entry occurs and becomes “Take 3” (in the case of “Take 2” → “Take 3”), a special figure 1 start entry occurs and “Take 4” Similarly, in the case of "" 3 "→" 4 ", as shown in FIGS. 59 (c) to 59 (e)," hold 2 "~ in the first presentation hold display area 9c. The first effect hold 9a corresponding to each hold number is displayed at a position corresponding to each of “hold 4”. On the other hand, when the first special figure hold corresponding to “hold 1” is digested in the state of “hold 4” shown in FIG. 59 (e), the state of “hold 3” shown in FIG. When the first special figure hold corresponding to “Hot 1” in the state of “Hold 3” is digested, the state of “Hold 2” shown in FIG. 59C is obtained, and “Hold 1” in the state of “Hold 2”. When the first special figure hold corresponding to “H” is digested, the state of “Take 1” shown in FIG. 59B is obtained, and the first special figure hold corresponding to “Take 1” is consumed in the state of “Take 1”. As a result, the state of “Hold 0” shown in FIG. In this way, in the first effect hold display area 9c and the change hold display area 9e, the display content changes according to the occurrence (increase) or digestion (decrease) of the first special figure hold.

  Under the display screen 7a constituted by each of the display areas, in the state B, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed as follows. That is, as shown in FIG. 60, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 60 (a)), the variation display is basically the third stop mode ( At the same time) (see FIG. 60B). This is because in the state B, the first special symbol time-shortening function and the high base generation function are operated, so that the fluctuation without reach can be digested in a short time and the game can be smoothly advanced. When the variable display stops in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop), it becomes clear for the player that there is no possibility of executing a special game (big hit game) immediately after the stop, so the player's expectation I won't talk to you. On the other hand, when there is an out-of-reach fluctuation or jackpot fluctuation (that is, a “reach fluctuation”), or a “reach-throwing out fluctuation” (a kind of fluctuation mode without reach), which is actually a normal fluctuation that appears to be a reach fluctuation. In this case, the variation display of the production symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (FIG. 60 (c) → (d), (c) → (e) → (f) reference). In addition, also when the chance eye effect in the state B to be described later is performed, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol).

  While the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner in this way, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a deviating manner (unevenness) as a result of the variable display, it is “out”. On the other hand, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a big hit mode (double eyes) as a result of the variable display, the big hit game can be executed. Instead, a round presentation or the like is performed as the jackpot game progresses. The types of jackpots that can occur in state B are basically the same as in state A. This is because the first special symbol success / failure determination is mainly performed. When the big hit game is “15R first big hit” or “4R second big hit”, the gaming state after the big hit game is high and low base state (state C, third gaming state), “4R In the case of “3rd big hit”, it becomes a high probability high base state (state B, high probability and second gaming state), and in the case of “4R fourth big hit”, a low probability high base state (state B, low probability and second gaming state). 2 gaming state) (see FIG. 6).

  In addition, in the low-accuracy base state in the state B, when the special symbol (mainly the first special symbol) is displayed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) without generating a big hit, the predetermined number of times The game state shifts to the state A (low probability low base state) with the execution of the eye variation display (outward variation), and after the variation display ends, the effect mode shifts from “E” to “A” or “B”. .

  In the state B, as described above, a notice effect (also referred to as “hold notice effect”) in which a notice image is displayed in the notice display area 9h can be executed as the special figure 1 reservation pre-read notice. Here, when the holding notice effect is not performed in the notice display area 9h, that is, when the notice image (stored display) is not displayed in the notice display area 9h, the entire notice display area 9h (entire area) is displayed. A predetermined effect image (effect display) is displayed. The effect image displayed in the notice display area 9h at this time is, for example, a background image or character image corresponding to the effect mode E, and is displayed on the display screen 7a in the state A (effect modes A and B) described above. Examples include a background image (background image corresponding to effect mode A or B), a character image (resident image) corresponding to a character selected (set) as the resident character described above, and the like. In addition, when the hold notice effect is not performed, the type of effect image (content of the effect display) displayed in the notice display area 9h may be changed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition such as passage of time or background change. Is possible. As described above, even when the preview image (stored display) is not displayed in the preview display area 9h, various effect images are displayed in the preview display area 9h, thereby displaying in the preview display area 9h. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect display to be performed, and to prevent the player from getting bored.

  On the other hand, when the hold notice effect is performed in the notice display area 9h, a predetermined position is set in the notice display area 9h corresponding to any one of the “hold 1” to “hold 4” in the first effect hold display area 9c. A preview image is displayed. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, “male characters B1 to B5” and “female characters L1 to L5” are set as characters appearing in the game effect. In this embodiment, among these characters, “female characters L1 to L5” are used in the hold notice effect, and five kinds of notice images corresponding to each character are provided. That is, “notice image Y1” corresponding to the female character L1, “notice image Y2” corresponding to the female character L2, “notice image Y3” corresponding to the female character L3, and “notice image corresponding to the female character L4”. Y4 ”and“ notice image Y5 ”corresponding to the female character L5. Then, depending on the type of the notice image displayed in the notice display area 9h among the notice images, the notice target hold (first special figure hold) that triggered the display of the notice image is “15R first big hit”, This suggests the possibility of a big hit suspension (big hit reliability) related to “4R second big hit”, “4R third big hit” or “4R fourth big hit”. In this embodiment, when the notice image Y5 is displayed, the jackpot reliability is determined to be the highest. Hereinafter, the jackpot reliability is in the order of the notice image Y4, the notice image Y3, the notice image Y2, and the notice image Y1. It is set to be low. In other words, the relationship of the jackpot reliability of each notice image is “notice image Y1” <“notice image Y2” <“notice image Y3” <“notice image Y4” <“notice image Y5”.

  The notice image that can be displayed in the notice display area 9h may be set not only for “female characters L1 to L5” but also for “male characters B1 to B5”. An image representing characters, figures, symbols, etc. that suggests a big hit reliability may be set as the preview image, and the type, number, content, etc. of the preview image can be arbitrarily set according to the model, specifications, and the like.

Here, FIG. 61 shows an example of the hold notice effect performed in the notice display area 9h. In the figure, the number of stored first special figure hold (the number of special figure 1 hold balls) is “4”, and the hold notice effect is performed with the first special figure hold corresponding to the “hold 4” as the hold subject to notice. Shows the case. In the figure, the first effect hold 9a related to the notice target hold is indicated by “shaded”, and the first effect hold 9a related to the hold other than the notice target hold is indicated by “no shade” (no pattern). ing.
Is shown.

  FIG. 61 (a) corresponds to the first effect hold 9a of “Take 4” in the situation where the change display of the effect symbol 8 is performed in the effect symbol display area 7b in synchronization with the change display of the first special symbol. Thus, a state in which the highly reliable notice image Y5 is displayed is shown. From this situation, when the fluctuation display is finished and the next first special figure hold, that is, the first special figure hold corresponding to “hold 1” is digested, and the special figure 1 hold ball number becomes “3”, The first effect hold 9a displayed at the position corresponding to “hold 1” in the first effect hold display area 9c is shifted to the right side of the screen and displayed as the effect hold 9e in the variable hold display area 9e. The first effect hold 9a that has been displayed at the positions corresponding to “Hot 4”, “Hold 3”, and “Hold 2” until then is shifted to the right side of the screen. It is displayed at a position corresponding to “Take 1” (see FIGS. 61A to 61B). At this time, the display position of the first effect hold 9a corresponding to the “hold 4” which is the hold for the advance notice moves to the “hold 3” position, and accordingly, the advance notice displayed in the notice display area 9h. The display position of the image Y5 is also moved (shifted) to the right, and the notice image Y5 is displayed in correspondence with the first effect hold 9a of “Take 3”.

  After that, the first special figure hold is digested without storing the new first special figure hold (the special figure 1 start ball is generated), and the special figure 1 hold ball number is “3” → “2”. → Each time it decreases by “1”, the first effect hold 9a displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c is shifted to the right, and is accordingly displayed in the notice display area 9h. The preview image Y5 is also shifted to the right (see FIG. 61 (b) → (c), FIG. 61 (c) → (d)). Then, the notice target hold that was the first special figure hold corresponding to “Take 4” at first becomes the first special figure hold corresponding to “Take 1” (see FIG. 61 (a) → (d)). When the first special figure hold corresponding to “hold 1” (that is, the notice target hold) is consumed, the first display that has been displayed at the position corresponding to “hold 1” in the first effect hold display area 9c until then. The production hold 9a is shifted to the right and displayed as the production hold 9e in the variable hold display area 9e, and is displayed in the notice display area 9h as corresponding to the first production hold 9a of “Take 1” until then. The notice image Y5 that has been displayed is displayed in the notice display area 9h (just above the change hold display area 9e) as corresponding to the effect hold 9e (see FIG. 61 (d) → (e)).

  Thus, when the hold notice effect (special figure 1 hold prefetch notice) is executed in the state B, the first effect in the first effect hold display area 9c and the variable hold display area 9e on the display screen 7a. The preview image is shifted and displayed in the preview display area 9h in conjunction with the shift display (moving display) of the hold 9a. State B is also a high-frequency state in which the frequency of game balls entering the second start port 21 (variable start port) is higher than usual, so that the first special figure hold is likely to occur, and accordingly, the first effect Opportunities for displaying the first production hold 9a (memory display) in the hold display area 9c and the variable hold display area 9e are increased. For this reason, the opportunity (an opportunity to execute the hold notice effect) of displaying the notice image (notice display) in the notice display area 9h also increases. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the game interest of state B (high frequency state).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first effect hold 9a displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c is constituted by a number representing the number of the special figure 1 hold balls. By shifting (moving) the display position of the effect hold 9a toward the change hold display area 9e, the number represented by the first effect hold 9a decreases by one. As a result of this and the shift display of the notice image in the notice display area 9h, a countdown effect that counts down until the first special figure hold (prediction object hold) that triggered the display of the notice image is consumed. It is also possible to show a hold notice effect. As a result, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the hold notice effect.

  An effect symbol display area 7b is provided above the notice display area 9h (directly above in this example). In the effect symbol display area 7b, the effect symbol 8 (8L, 8C, 8R) can be displayed, and the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is synchronized with the variation display of the first special symbol executed in the state B. Is executable. The effect symbol display area 7b in this state B has a smaller area size than the notice display area 9h. In other words, the notice display area 9h (notice image) is configured to be larger than the effect symbol display area 7b (effect symbol 8). This is because the display contents of the notice display area 9h, that is, the display of the notice image in the notice display area 9h is highlighted and the player is noticed in the notice display area 9h even during the variation display of the effect symbol 8 (during the variation effect). This is because such a screen configuration makes it possible to enhance the gaming fun of the state B. In such a notice display area 9h (second display section) having a larger area size (display range) than the effect symbol display area 7b (third display section), the first effect hold display area 9c and the variable hold display area 9e. The on-hold notice effect in a mode in which the notice image is shifted and displayed in conjunction with the on-hold shift display on the (first display unit) is a notice effect (notice display) based on a new display mode that has not been conventionally provided. It will be easier to attract the attention of the player. As a result, it is possible to realize an on-hold notice effect having a different taste from that of the prior art, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment interest.

  Here, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61, the preview image Y5 displayed in the preview display area 9h as corresponding to the first presentation hold 9a displayed in the first presentation hold display area 9c is When displayed in the notice display area 9h as corresponding to the effect hold 9e displayed in the variable hold display area 9e, the display mode may change (change). Thus, when the display mode of the preview image changes, it is suggested that the jackpot reliability has increased. Accordingly, it is possible to enhance the preference of the hold notice effect and attract the player's interest to the notice image (notice display) displayed in the notice display area 9h. The change in the display mode of the preview image occurs when the preview image moves in a position corresponding to the first effect hold display region 9c (above the first effect hold display region 9c) in the notice display region 9h. You may comprise so that it may obtain. It is of course possible to configure so that the display mode of the preview image is not changed (not changed).

  In the present embodiment, the hold notice effect processing (S5000) shown in FIG. This hold notice effect process (S5000) is executed based on the fact that the sub-control board 90 has received the start-in ball command transmitted from the main control board 80 when the game ball enters the start port in the state B. Specifically, it is executed in response to the process of S4401 of the received command analysis process (S4302) described above. Hereinafter, the hold notice effect process (S5000) of the present embodiment will be described.

[Hold notice effect processing]
As shown in FIG. 62, in the hold notice effect process (S5000), it is first determined whether or not the hold notice effect flag is OFF (S5001). Here, the hold notice effect flag indicates whether or not the hold notice effect (special figure 1 hold prefetch notice) is being executed in the aforementioned notice display area 9h. This hold notice effect flag is turned on by S5007 described later when the hold notice effect is executed, and then the notice target hold (first special figure hold) that triggers the execution of the hold notice effect is digested, and the change related to the hold. Turns OFF when the display ends.

  If it is determined in S5001 that the hold notice effect flag is not OFF (ON) (NO in S5001), since execution of the hold notice effect has already been decided and is currently in the hold notice effect execution period, S5002 and after This process is finished without performing the process. In this case, it is not determined whether or not to newly execute (start) the hold notice effect (Special Figure 1 hold prefetch notice).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S5001 that the hold notice effect flag is OFF (YES in S5001), it is determined whether or not the start ball entering command determined to have been received in the previous S4401 is a special figure 1 start ball entering command. If it is determined (S5002) and it is determined that it is not a special figure 1 start incoming command (NO in S5002), that is, if the received start incoming command is a special figure 2 start incoming command, the processing after S5003 is performed. This processing is finished without

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S5002 that it is a special figure 1 start ball entry command (YES in S5002), the latest special figure 1 holding ball number including the start ball entry related to the special figure 1 start ball entry command is It is determined whether or not the predetermined value is “N” or more (S5003). When it is determined that the special figure 1 number of reserved balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined value “N” (YES in S5003), the process proceeds to S5004, and when it is determined that the number is not equal to or greater than the predetermined value “N” (NO in S5003), This process ends without performing the processes after S5004. In this embodiment, the predetermined value “N” is “3”.

  Here, if the number of special figure 1 hold balls is not “N” or more, that is, if it is “2” or less in the present embodiment, the hold notice effect (special figure 1 hold prefetch notice) is not newly executed (started). It will be. This is because the hold notice effect (special figure 1 hold prefetch notice) in the state B is executed by displaying the notice image in the notice display area 9h larger than the effect symbol display area 7b as described above. In order for the player to pay attention to the notice image (notice display) that moves in the notice display area 9h as the first special figure is reserved, the upper limit is as much as possible. This is because it is desirable to generate the hold notice effect (special figure 1 hold pre-read notice) in a state where the number of first special figure holds close to the number ("4" in this example) is stored.

  Next, in S5004, execution determination of the hold notice effect is performed (S5004). This execution determination is performed based on a predetermined condition. In the present embodiment, the first special figure hold related to the latest special figure 1 start entry determined as the special figure 1 start entry command in S5002, that is, the first special figure hold with the newest storage order (latest (Acquired information) is reserved for the advance notice, and it is possible to suggest the jackpot reliability (expected expectation of big hit) for the hold by displaying the notice image in the notice display area 9h. For this reason, in this embodiment, as a condition for executing the hold notice effect, the first special figure hold stored before the notice target hold is all out of the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination. It is stipulated that it is a hold (off hold). In addition, when all the first special figure hold stored before the notice target hold is off-hold, all the fluctuation patterns corresponding to the off-hold hold become a fluctuation pattern of 2 seconds of fluctuation time, that is, It is defined as a condition for executing the hold notice effect that a fluctuation pattern without reach is executed (also referred to as a “reachless deviation fluctuation pattern”). This is because, for example, during a holding notice effect execution period before the notice target hold that triggers the execution of the holding notice effect is executed, fluctuations with relatively long fluctuation times (such as deviation fluctuations with reach) are executed. Then, there is a length in the digestion interval of the first special figure hold until the notice target hold (the first special figure change time and the later first special figure change time), and the flow of the entire hold notice effect This is because (rhythm) gets worse. It should be noted that the determination of “big hit / losing”, “variation pattern type”, etc. related to the first special figure hold stored before the notice target hold is the stored contents of the special figure 1 effect hold information storage area described above. This can be done based on (production hold information).

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, winning the holding notice effect execution lottery is defined as a condition for executing the holding notice effect. Specifically, as a random number for determining the effect, a random number for determining the advance notice effect is provided. A lottery (random number lottery) of notice effects is performed. In the present embodiment, a plurality of lottery tables are provided according to the advance determination result of the advance notice hold (acquired information stored as hold), and depending on the type of the table (that is, the advance decision result of the advance notice hold) The probabilities of winning the lottery for the holding notice effect are different.

  Specifically, for example, when the notice target hold is a jackpot hold, or when the notice target hold is an off hold and the special pattern change pattern (special figure change pattern) when digesting the off hold is a change time of 30 seconds When the above pattern is used (for example, the first special figure variation pattern random number value “0 to 9” in the state B, see FIG. 9), using a lottery table having a relatively high winning probability of the execution lottery, The notice target hold is likely to appear. In particular, since the reach pattern is performed for a change pattern with a change time of 30 seconds or more, it is possible to obtain a series of effects that lead to a reach effect after holding a notice target hold, which can enhance the entertainment fun of the game Because it becomes.

  Further, when the notice target hold is a release hold, and the special figure fluctuation pattern when digesting the release hold becomes a pattern with a change time of 2 seconds (for example, the first special figure change pattern random value “10 to 10 in state B) 198 "(see Fig. 9)), the use of a lottery table with a relatively low winning probability of the execution lottery makes it difficult for the notice target hold to appear. Since the fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is performed without reach (no reach design pattern game effect), even if the hold notice effect appears, the change effect accompanying digestion of the notice target hold is simply This is to reduce as much as possible the case of ending with deviation fluctuation (normal fluctuation) (so-called “gase” hold notice effect). As a result, it is possible to suppress the interest reduction.

  When the target hold corresponds to the number of held balls “4”, there is a special figure hold of the number of held balls “1” to “3” before that, so that the chance eye notice can be executed three times. Even if the chance eye notice appears three times, the player's sense of expectation is greatly diminished if the fluctuating effect resulting from the digestion of the target hold is out of reach. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the target hold is an off-hold with the number of held balls “4” and may have a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 12000 ms or less, a prohibition that does not execute the hold notice effect is provided. Yes.

  In S5004, execution determination is performed based on the above-described conditions (execution conditions) related to execution of the hold notice effect, and if all the conditions are satisfied, the execution conditions of the hold notice effect are satisfied (YES in S5005), Proceed to step S5006. On the other hand, if any one of the above conditions is not satisfied, it is determined that the execution condition for the hold notice effect has not been established (NO in S5005), and this process is terminated without performing the processes after S5006.

  Here, the acquisition information related to the hold (notice target hold) that satisfies the execution condition of the hold notice effect and triggers the execution of the chance notice is also referred to as “predetermined acquisition information”. It should be noted that the execution conditions of the above-described holding notice effect are merely examples, and it is of course possible to set conditions other than the above-described conditions, and the number of conditions is arbitrary.

  Next, in S5006, the execution pattern of the hold notice effect (hold notice effect pattern) is set (S5006). In this embodiment, a random number for holding notice effect pattern determination (random number range 0 to 99) is provided as a random number for effect determination, and a holding notice effect pattern is determined using the obtained random number and the holding notice effect determination table ( Select) and set this. A plurality of hold notice effect determination tables are provided, and an example thereof is shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 63, as the hold notice effect determination table, for example, the big hit hold table A corresponding to the case where the notice target hold that triggered the hold notice effect is the big hit hold (see FIG. 63 (a)). ) And a table B (see FIG. 63 (b)) corresponding to the case where the notice target hold is a release hold.

  The hold notice effect determination table has a data structure in which a random number for determining the hold notice effect pattern is assigned to each of the plurality of hold notice effects patterns. Specifically, a random value (determination data) is assigned within a random number range “0 to 99” of the random number for determining the hold notice effect pattern. The hold notice effect pattern determines which of the aforementioned notice images Y1 to Y5 (female characters L1 to L5) is to be displayed in the notice display area 9h, and the notice target hold is a big hit hold. Selectable patterns A1 to A5 (see FIG. 63 (a)) and patterns B1 to B5 (see FIG. 63 (a)) that can be selected when the notice target hold is a big hit hold are provided. As described above, in this embodiment, the relationship of the jackpot reliability of the preview images Y1 to Y5 is expressed as “preview image Y1” <“preview image Y2” <“preview image Y3” <“preview image Y4” <“preview image Y5”. Accordingly, the selection rate of the hold notice effect pattern is determined based on the hold notice effect determination table A for jackpot hold (see FIG. 63A) and the hold notice effect determination table B for off hold (see FIG. 63). (See (b)).

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, during execution of the hold notice effect, the notice image displayed in the notice display area 9h as corresponding to the first effect hold 9a is assumed to correspond to the effect hold 9e. When displayed in the notice display area 9h, the display mode may change (change) (see FIG. 61). Corresponding to this, in the present embodiment, whether to change the display mode of the preview image is determined together with the determination of the pending notice effect pattern. This determination can be made based on a random number for determining the pending notice effect pattern and a display mode table (not shown), and the presence / absence of a change in the display mode of the notice image is determined by the table. That is, when the notice target hold is a jackpot hold, there is a relatively high possibility that the display mode of the notice image will change, and when the notice target hold is out of hold, the display form of the notice image may change. The presence / absence of a change in the display mode of the preview image is determined so that the property is relatively low.

  In S5006, the hold notice effect pattern is determined based on the above table and the like, and this is set as the execution pattern of the current hold notice effect. Next, the hold notice effect flag is set to ON (S5007), and this process is finished.

  The hold notice effect in state B is realized by the above hold notice effect process (S5000).

  In state B (effect mode E), a chance eye effect can be executed as a notice effect (special figure 1 hold pre-reading notice) based on the result of the first special figure hold pre-determination (S322). The chance content effect in state B is different from the opportunity eye effect in state A described above in the effect content (effect mode). Hereinafter, the chance eye effect executed in the state B will be described focusing on portions different from the chance eye effect in the state A.

[Chance eye production in state B]
In the above-described state A, the stop appearance (same color appearance) when the three symbols constituting the effect symbol 8 (effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R) are all stopped and displayed with the same color (same classification) of the broken eyes. It was a chance eye (red chance eye, green chance eye, blue chance eye). On the other hand, in the state B, when the three symbols constituting the effect symbol 8 (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are stopped and displayed in a combination of symbols that are in a specific order, I have a chance. Specifically, the numbers of the three symbols constituting the production symbol 8 are arranged in ascending order from left to right, and are “2-3-4”, “4-5-6”, and “6-7”. The outcome of “−8” is set as the chance chance of state B. Of these, the chance chance of “2-3-4” is also called “first chance”, the chance eye of “4-5-6” is also called “second chance”, “6-7- The eighth chance chance is also called the “third chance”.

  It should be noted that the arrangement order of the symbols composing the chance eyes is not limited to this embodiment. For example, “1-2-3”, “5-6-7”, etc. are arranged in ascending order from left to right. The symbol combinations may be defined as chances, or symbol combinations arranged in descending order from left to right, such as “3-2-1” and “6-5-4”, may be defined as chances. Further, for example, a symbol combination that forms a word having a specific meaning, such as “2-2-3” (Mt. Fuji) or “8-3-1” (vegetables), may be determined as an opportunity.

  Further, in this embodiment, the big hit reliability is determined depending on the type (in this example, a number) of the middle symbol 8C among the three symbols constituting the chance symbol when the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed at the chance symbol in the state B. The degree is suggested. Specifically, when the middle symbol 8C constituting the chance eye is “3”, the hold when the first special figure hold that becomes an opportunity to execute the chance eye effect is “15R first big hit”, “ The appearance rate of chance eyes is determined so that the possibility of being a big hit hold related to “4R second big hit”, “4R third big hit” or “4R fourth big hit” is determined. The jackpot reliability is determined to decrease in the order of “7” and “5”. That is, the relationship of the jackpot reliability for each chance is “second chance” <“third chance” <“first chance”.

  Here, in the state B, the big hit reliability is suggested by the type of the middle symbol among the three symbols constituting the chance eye. The state B is the first special symbol short-time state in which the first special symbol short-time function operates. This is because the execution (start) and stop (end) of the variation effect (variation display) are repeated in a short time, and it is easy for the player to grasp the big hit reliability instantly when the chance eye is stopped and displayed. It is to do. This also affects the stop order when the chance eye is stopped and displayed in the state B, that is, the middle symbol becomes the final stop symbol (second stop mode: left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol). That is, by making the player pay attention to the symbol that is stopped and displayed at the end, the ease of grasping the jackpot reliability is enhanced.

  In addition, the suggestion of the jackpot reliability when the chance eye is stopped and displayed in the state B is not limited to the middle symbol type, but is suggested by the left symbol type or the right symbol type. It is also possible to do. In this case, it is also possible to determine the symbol stop order (stop mode) when the chance eye is stopped and displayed according to the type of the symbol related to the suggestion of jackpot reliability. For example, when suggesting by the type of the left symbol, the left symbol can be the final stop symbol, and when suggesting by the type of the right symbol, the right symbol can be the final symbol. In addition, when the chance item is stopped and displayed, the stop order (stop mode) is determined each time, and as a result of the determination, the jackpot reliability is suggested depending on the type of the symbol that has become the final stop symbol. It is also possible to configure. In this way, it is possible to increase variations in the suggestion of the big hit reliability when the chance eyes are stopped and displayed.

  Further, the chance eye effect in the state B is executed when an execution condition different from the chance eye effect in the state A is satisfied. Specifically, (A) When the number of special figure 1 reserved balls becomes “0” due to the start of variable display of the first special symbol (a new special figure 1 start-up when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is “0”) Generation of spheres or special figure 1 number of reserved balls "1" reserved digestion) and the fluctuation display is executed based on the deviation fluctuation pattern "P19" (see FIG. 9), (B) the first special symbol When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 becomes any one of “1” to “3” due to the start of the fluctuation display, the deviation variation pattern “P17” or “P18” falls within the number of held balls “1” to “3”. ”(See FIG. 9) is stored, and detachment hold (specific offhold, specific acquisition information) that triggers execution of variation display is stored, and the variation display is out of variation pattern“ P19 ”(see FIG. 9). (C) The number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 by the variable display start of the first special symbol Execution of variation display based on the big hit variation pattern “P15” or “P16” (see FIG. 9) in the case of any of “1” to “3” and the number of retained balls “1” to “3” The jackpot hold (specific acquisition information) as an opportunity is stored, and the variation display is executed based on the variation pattern “P19” (see FIG. 9). In addition, (D) “chance eye notice” is set as the notice effect (notice effect pattern) in the change effect start process (S4404) when starting the change display of the first special symbol based on the deviation change pattern “P19”. If it is made (S4506), a chance eye effect is executed.

  Further, the chance eye effect in the state A uses the pseudo ream effect (pseudo ream effect), and the chance eye stop is executed a plurality of times (within one change) in one change effect. However, in the chance B effect in the state B, one chance stop is executed for one change effect (one change). This is because the state B is the first special symbol time-short state, and it is difficult to secure a time for stopping and displaying the chance eye a plurality of times during one variation effect.

  It should be noted that the chance variation effect is performed in the situation in which the specific outage hold (outgoing variation pattern “P17” or “P18”) is stored, the variation variation pattern “P17, P18” has a variation time of 30 seconds or more ( This is because the reach effect (P18) and the specific effect (P17) are executed as the change effect based on the change pattern. Further, the reason for performing the chance eye effect in the situation where the big hit hold is stored is the same as the case of the chance eye effect in the state A described above. As described above, the reach effect and the specific effect are executed through the chance eye effect, so that in the state B which is the first special symbol time-short state, the short-time fluctuation mainly of 2 seconds (displacement fluctuation pattern “P19”). While the first special symbol based on () is executed), the player's expectation for the big hit can be effectively beaten, and the gaming interest can be improved.

  The chance eye effect pattern in the state B is a pattern that stops and displays the first chance (also referred to as “first chance pattern”) and a pattern that stops and displays the second chance (also referred to as “second chance pattern”). ) And a pattern for stopping and displaying the third chance (also referred to as a “third chance pattern”). Then, the number of executions of the chance eye effect (depending on which of the above conditions (A), (B), and (C) is satisfied among the execution conditions that are the triggers for executing the chance eye effect ( The number of chances of stop display) is determined. For example, when the chance eye effect is executed by satisfying the conditions (A) and (D), the chance eye effect is executed once.

  Further, when the chance eye effect is executed when the conditions (B) and (D) are satisfied, and when the chance eye effect is executed when the conditions (C) and (D) are satisfied The number of executions can be determined on the basis of the number of special figure 1 held balls up to the digestion of specific off hold or jackpot hold (specific acquisition information). For example, when the first special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 1 hold ball number “3” is a specific off-hold hold or a jackpot hold, the special figure 1 hold ball numbers “1” and “2” until the hold is reached. Since the two first special figure reservations are consumed, the number of executions of the chance eye effect is two at the maximum. In this case, the chance eye effect may be executed with a variation effect based on the respective 1st special figure reservations of the special figure 1 reserved ball numbers “1” and “2”, or either one of the first special figure hold is held. The chance eye effect may be executed by a variation effect based on digestion. However, if the chance eye effect is executed with the variable effect based on the use of all the first special figure reservations until the special off-hold or jackpot hold is consumed, the chance eye notice is executed twice or more consecutively. Therefore, an effect as a so-called “continuous notice” is obtained, and it becomes possible to further enhance the interest.

  Next, the flow of the effect when the chance eye effect is executed in the state B will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the case where the chance eye effect is executed based on the conditions (3) and (4) among the execution conditions of the chance eye effect described above will be described as an example. Specifically, a jackpot hold is stored as the first special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved ball number “4”, and the special figure 1 hold ball number “1” to the reserved big hit hold is digested. When the chance stage effect is executed with the variation effect based on the digestion of the first special figure hold corresponding to each of “3”, that is, the first special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 1 hold ball number “4” (big hit A case will be described as an example in which the chance eye effect is executed three times by the on-hold). As the chance production pattern, the first chance stop is the “second chance pattern” (big hit reliability: low), and the second chance stop is the “third chance pattern” (big hit reliability: Middle) Assume that the first chance stop is set to “first chance pattern” (big hit reliability: high). In addition, the determination (setting) of the chance eye effect pattern in the state B is the same as the determination of the chance eye effect pattern in the state A described above and the prior determination result (the special figure 1 reservation prefetch result) of the first special figure hold. This is performed based on a chance eye effect pattern determination table (not shown) that defines the selection conditions (selection rates) of the chance eye effect patterns in state B, a notice effect determination random number, and the like (S4506).

  FIG. 64A shows the first special figure hold (big hit hold) corresponding to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls “4” as an opportunity to execute the chance eye effect, and the special figure 1 reserved ball in which the chance eye effect is executed. The first special figure hold (disengagement hold) corresponding to the numbers “1” to “3” is stored, and the first special figure change (variation effect) associated with the first first special figure hold digestion is stored. The display content of the effect symbol display area 7b (display screen 7a) when it is finished is shown. Note that FIG. 64 shows the minimum display contents necessary to explain the outline of the chance eye effect, and illustrations of effect images such as backgrounds and characters that can be displayed in other variable effects are omitted. .

  When the first special figure hold (release hold) corresponding to the special figure 1 hold ball number “1” is digested from the state of FIG. 64 (A) (the state of the special figure 1 hold ball number “4”), FIG. As shown in 64 (B), the variation display of the effect design 8 is started, and the special figure 1 reserved ball number becomes “3”. Then, at the timing when the variation time (2 seconds in this case) of the variation display (the variation effect) elapses, as shown in FIG. 64C, the second chance (“4-5” is set as the first chance stop. -6 ") is stopped (determined stop), and the change display (change effect) ends.

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the chance eye is stopped and displayed in the state B, the size (symbol) of the middle symbol 8C (the symbol related to the suggestion of the big hit reliability) among the three symbols constituting the chance eye. The display is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the size is larger than the other two symbols (left symbol 8L and right symbol 8R) (see FIGS. 64A, 64C, 64E, and 64G). In this way, the middle symbol 8C related to the suggestion of jackpot reliability is displayed with a greater emphasis than the other symbols 8L and 8R, thereby making it easier for the player to pay attention to the chance eye stop and the suggestion of the jackpot reliability. It becomes possible to do. Such highlighted display of the middle symbol 8C corresponds to an effect effect at the time of the chance eye stop display, and the display of the effect image E executed at the time of the chance eye stop display in the state A described above (FIG. 55). Synonymous with reference). In addition, the effect presentation accompanying the stop display of the chance eye in the state B is not limited to a mode in which the middle symbol 8C is displayed larger than the other symbols 8L and 8R as in the present embodiment. For example, the other symbols 8L and 8R are made darker than normal in accordance with the stop display of the chance eye, and the middle symbol 8C is displayed at normal brightness or brighter than normal, or the middle symbol is displayed in accordance with the stop display of the chance eye The effect effect associated with the chance eye stop may be executed by causing only 8C to be bounced or displayed, such that only the middle symbol 8C is rotated in accordance with the chance eye stop display. In addition, a predetermined sound effect (chance eye stop sound) may be output in the same manner as the chance eye stop in the state A, or an effect effect may be performed using other electrical decoration members or movable decoration members. Good.

  After the first chance stop, when the next first special figure hold (release hold) is consumed, as shown in FIG. 64 (D), the variation display of the production symbol 8 is started. Becomes “2”. Then, at the timing when the variation time (2 seconds in this case) of the variation display (the variation effect) elapses, as shown in FIG. 64E, the third chance ("6-7" -8 ") is stopped (determined stop), and the change display (the change effect) ends. Also at this time, the effect production (highlighting of the middle symbol 8C) is executed in the same manner as the first chance stop. It is also possible to make the mode of the effect stop and the first chance stop different. For example, it is possible to output a stop sound different from the first time, or to change the operation when the middle symbol 8C is stopped and displayed from the first time.

  After the second chance stop, when the next first special figure hold (disengagement hold) is consumed, as shown in FIG. Becomes “1”. Then, at the timing when the variation time (2 seconds in this case) of the variation display (the variation effect) elapses, as shown in FIG. 64 (G), the first chance (“2-3”) -4 ") is stopped (determined stop), and the change display (the change effect) ends. Also at this time, the effect production (highlighting of the middle symbol 8C) is executed in the same way as the first and second chance stop. Note that, as described above, it is possible to make the mode of effect production different from the first and second chance stop.

  After the third chance stop, when the next first special figure hold (big hit hold) is consumed, as shown in FIG. Becomes “0”. Since the first special figure hold digested at this time is the big hit hold that triggered the execution of the chance eye effect at this time, the reach is established as shown in FIG. Proceed to production. Thereafter, a specific effect (super reach effect, development effect, etc.) with a relatively high jackpot reliability is executed, and finally the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed in a big hit mode (horizontal), and the big hit is determined.

  The above is an overview of the chance eye effect in state B, but the chance eye effect in state B is different from the above-described chance eye effect in state A. It is a one-time event, and the configuration pattern of chances is not the same in all three symbols, but is configured by the order of the three symbols (in this example, ascending order from the left symbol to the right symbol) Has been. As a result, it becomes possible to make the player pay attention to the chance according to the gaming state, and the player is identified as the difference between the chance eye that can be stopped and displayed in the state A and the chance eye that can be stopped and displayed in the state B. It is possible to improve the gaming atmosphere by paying attention.

  In addition, in the chance eye effect in state A, the big hit reliability is suggested by the colors (classifications) of the three symbols that make up the chance eye, whereas in the chance eye effect in state B, among the three symbols that make up the chance eye effect The jackpot reliability is suggested by the number of numbers of one symbol (in this example, middle symbol). As a result, the manner in which the jackpot reliability is suggested differs between the case where the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed at the chance in state A and the case where the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed at the chance in state B. Thus, it becomes possible to make the player pay attention to each opportunity.

  Furthermore, the aspect of the effect effect executed when the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed at the chance eye is different between the chance eye effect in the state A and the chance eye effect in the state B. Thereby, in addition to the chance item, the effect effect mode can be changed depending on the game state, and the player can easily pay attention to the stop display when the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed at the chance item.

  Further, in state B, as a notice effect (special figure 1 reservation pre-reading notice) based on the result of the first special figure hold pre-determination (S322), in the notice display area 9h and the effect symbol display area 7b It is feasible to perform the chance eye production. As described above, in the state B, two types of hold prefetching notices having different tastes can be executed at different positions (areas) on one display screen 7a, so that the short-time variation display is repeatedly repeated. It is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game in the high-frequency state (state B) that tends to be easy, and to realize an effect that does not bore the player. In particular, when the first special figure hold that triggers the execution of the hold notice effect in the notice display area 9h and the first special figure hold that triggers the execution of the chance eye effect in the effect symbol display area 7b are the same hold. Until the hold is consumed, the hold notice effect in the notice display area 9h and the chance eye effect in the effect symbol display area 7b are executed at the same time (overlapping). Thereby, the effect display on the display screen 7a can be more lively, and the effect can be further enhanced.

[Game production in state C]
The game effects that are executed in the state C that is the high probability low base state (third game state) are mainly based on the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination triggered by the ball entering the third start port 26. An effect symbol game effect (fluctuation effect) performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, and an effect accompanying the occurrence of a small hit (small hit game effect). The state C is an advantageous gaming state (specific gaming state) in which a lot of winning balls can be expected from the big hits by repeating the small hits until the next big hit occurs. Therefore, in the state C, a special effect in which the effect symbol game effect and the small hit game effect are linked is performed.

  In the state C, as described above, “C” or “D” is set as the effect mode. Here, in the second embodiment, the production modes C and D in the state C are set as internal modes for production control. Basic effects such as symbols, background images, etc.) and various effect sounds (sound, music, sound effects, etc.) output as the effect progresses are the same. For this reason, the player recognizes that there is one type of effect mode corresponding to the state C on the surface (apparently). On the other hand, the execution of the effect symbol game effect (variation effect related to 15R jackpot fluctuation) performed when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is “big hit” and the type of the jackpot is “15R fifth jackpot”. The mode is different between the production mode C and the production mode D. Therefore, the effect mode D functions as a trigger for executing (generating) the change effect related to the 15R big hit change in a mode different from the normal (effect mode C).

  In this embodiment, when the big hit game related to the big hit (15R first big hit, 4R second big hit, 15R fifth big hit), which becomes an opportunity to shift to the state C, is finished, the sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) It is assumed that the production mode C (mode status “3”) is set by default with the transition to the state C under the control. Then, when a predetermined mode transition condition is established while the game in the state C progresses, the effect mode D is set instead of the effect mode C (the effect mode D is shifted to), and then a big hit occurs in the effect mode D If the change display of the second special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) without doing so, the effect mode C is set again (returning to the effect mode C).

  The mode transition condition is, for example, that the variation display of the second special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) without generating a big hit in the rendering mode C, or by the sub control unit 90 (the rendering control microcomputer 91). A specific hold (for example, 15R fifth big hit hold) is stored in the second special figure hold by winning the mode transition lottery executed under the control, and prior determination (special figure 2 hold pre-read) related to the second special symbol It can be determined that the player is determined to win the mode transition lottery. Moreover, you may make it switch periodically between effect mode C and effect mode D based on progress of predetermined time using an internal timer.

  As described above, in the state C, although “C” or “D” is internally set as the effect mode, the surface (appearance) is basically the same (one type) effect mode. Therefore, in the following description, it is assumed that the basic performance mode corresponding to the state C is “C”.

  In the effect mode C (state C), as shown in FIGS. 65A and 65B, the effect symbol 8 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and behind the effect symbol 8. A background image, a character, etc. (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode are displayed. As in the state B (effect mode E), the effect symbol 8 displayed in the effect mode C is “2”, “6”, “8” symbols composed of blue symbols, “1” composed of green symbols, It consists of symbols “4” and “9” and symbols “3”, “5” and “7” consisting of red symbols. In the present embodiment, the state (design) of the production symbol 8 is different between the state B and the state C. In addition, about the aspect (design) of the production symbol 8 which concerns on the state C, it is possible to take various aspects, such as making it the same as the state A and making it the same as the state B.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), a right-handed instruction image M for instructing right-handedness is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a, and the number of acquired winning balls (acquired) is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a. A prize ball count image C indicating (profit amount) is displayed. The right-handed instruction image M is the same as in the state B (effect mode E). The winning ball count image C includes an image (numerical image) that can display a 5-digit number from “00000” to “99999” and a character image of “pt” (points). This award ball count image C mainly displays the number of winning balls (the number of winning winning balls) acquired by the player through a big hit game, a small hit game, or the like as the number of points, and the gaming state after the big hit game is displayed. In the case of the state C, the number of winning prizes (so-called consecutive resorts) during that time until the game state becomes the state A (except for the big hit game) or the state B, that is, until the state C ends. The number of winning balls during the period) is displayed. In addition, since state C (highly accurate low base state) is an advantageous state in which small hits occur frequently (the frequency of execution of small hit games increases), winning balls (increase in possession) in small hit games The prize ball count image C is displayed to produce the effect. In other words, as a small hit game effect, an effect display (ball entry effect) by the winning ball count image C is performed.

  With reference to FIG. 65, the basic flow of variation display of effect symbol 8 (effect symbol game effect) in effect mode C having such a screen configuration will be described in detail. In FIG. 65, for the sake of convenience of explanation, some display contents such as production hold (holding symbol) and background are omitted. As shown in FIG. 65, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 65 (a)), the variation display is basically stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (FIG. 65). 65 (b)). This is because, in the state C, the second special symbol time shortening function operates, so that the variation without reach can be digested in a short time as much as possible so that the game can proceed smoothly. Therefore, when the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is “off” and the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed with normal variation, the variation display is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop). When the variation display of the production symbol 8 stops in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop), it becomes clear for the player that there is no possibility of executing a special game (big hit game, small hit game) immediately after the stop. . For this reason, when the variable display is stopped in the third stop mode, an effect (swing effect) for enhancing the player's expectation is not performed.

  On the other hand, when the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is “out” or “big hit” and the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed by reach fluctuation (out or big hit) or reach loss deviation fluctuation, the production symbol 8 The change display is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (see FIGS. 65 (c) → (d), (c) → (e) → (f)). In addition, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination being “small hit”, the variation display is performed with the normal variation, and then the first stop mode (left The design symbol 8 is stopped in a symbol → middle symbol → right symbol), and the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a specific variation (small hit mode) as a display result of the variable display (see FIG. 65 (g) → (h) → (i)). ).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all red symbols, and two adjacent symbols among the three symbols are the same, and the other one is a different symbol combination (“335”, “355”). , “557”, and the like) are defined as specific breaks (small hit mode). The symbol combination that constitutes a specific break is not a reach establishment, but constitutes a combination in which two adjacent symbols become the same symbol (number), so such a symbol combination is referred to as a “reach arrangement”. Also called.

  Of the symbols (“3”, “5”, “7”) that make up a specific break (small hit mode), the symbols “3” and “5” constitute a specific break in state A. Although it is a green symbol (first symbol type) that cannot be obtained, in state C, it is a red symbol (second symbol type) that can constitute a specific broken eye. That is, the symbols “3” and “5” are symbols whose symbol type changes depending on the gaming state. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the player by drawing attention to the symbol type (in this example, the color type) of the effect symbol. In particular, when small hits occur frequently, the stop display of a specific spot (small hit mode) is frequently executed, and may be stopped and displayed a plurality of times continuously. It becomes possible to collect.

  In this embodiment, a part of the production symbols (“1”, “5”, “9”) that are green symbols in the state A, and a specific loose eye (first display mode) in the state C. The red symbol that can be configured is, for example, a part of the production symbol (“2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) that is a blue symbol in the state A, Each of the design symbols (“2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) that are blue symbols and the design symbols (“1”, “5”, “9”) that are green symbols It is also possible to make a part of (for example, “4” and “5”) red. Further, as a symbol type, a symbol type dedicated to the state C that does not exist (appear) in the state A may be provided, and a specific break pattern (small hit mode) may be configured by symbols belonging to the dedicated symbol type. For example, a golden symbol (gold symbol) may be provided as a symbol type dedicated to state C, and a part of the effect symbol that is green in state A may be a gold symbol in state C. Thereby, it becomes possible to make a player's attention easy by making a symbol type that can constitute a specific broken eye stand out more.

  Or you may comprise so that the symbol of "7" which was a red symbol (2nd symbol type) from the beginning in the state A might be a gold symbol in the state C. In this case, in the state C, the symbols “3” and “5”, which are the red symbols (second symbol type), are symbols that can constitute a specific spot (small hit pattern), and the gold symbol (third symbol) The symbol “7”, which is a seed), can be set to a 15R big hit mode corresponding to 15R fifth big hit (a flat eye of “7”, a specific display mode). This makes it possible to clearly distinguish the symbol type (red symbol) constituting a specific rosette (small hit mode) from the symbol type (gold symbol) constituting a specific Zoromorph (15R big hit mode). It is possible to clearly show the correspondence between the symbol type and the symbol type.

  In addition, any of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (for example, medium symbol 8C) is provided with a symbol dedicated to small hits (eg, “medium symbol for small hits”) that is stopped and displayed when winning a small hit. When a symbol dedicated to hit is displayed in a stopped state, regardless of the type of the remaining symbols, that is, regardless of the stop event (stop display mode) composed of three symbols, You may make it alert | report the generation | occurrence | production of a small hit (small winning winning). This also makes it easier to understand the occurrence of small hits, making it easier to attract the attention of the player.

  In the present embodiment, the first stop mode that cannot appear in the other display modes when the small hit mode in the display mode C (in this example, the red symbol reach arrangement) is derived and displayed (stop of the variable display). The change display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the order of stop of left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol). For this reason, not only the small hit mode (reach arrangement of red symbols) but also the stop mode of the variable display that triggers the small hit mode is noticed by the player. Further, in the effect mode C, in the derivation display of the small hit mode (stop display of the effect symbol 8), the effect display that emphasizes the display of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of red symbols) is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65 (i), an effect image E (effect effect image) configured as an image (decoration image) that decorates the periphery of each of the left, middle, and right symbols is displayed. . Thus, the display of the small hit mode (the execution of the small hit game) can be emphasized when the variable display is stopped in the first stop mode, and the variable display is stopped in the first stop mode. It is possible to enhance the production effect. The aspect of the effect image E is not limited to the present embodiment, and various other aspects can be adopted.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the second big prize opening 35 in the small hit game executed with the display of the small hit mode as an opportunity, the winning prize ball indicated by the prize ball count image C is shown for each of the balls. The number (numerical image) is added and displayed (updated). In this embodiment, the number of prize balls based on the ball entered into the second big prize opening 35 is 10 prize balls per ball, so that the winning prize indicated by the prize ball count image C is shown. The number of balls is added in units of ten. The effect of adding and displaying the number of winning prize balls (acquired profit amount) indicated by the winning ball count image C is also referred to as “acquired profit effect”. Further, when a small hit game is executed with the display of the small hit mode as an opportunity, an effect display (character) by a character (not shown) displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a with the execution of the small hit game. Directing). Specifically, an effect in which a character emits a predetermined line (line effect display + line speech output) or an effect in which the character shows a predetermined movement (character operation display) is performed.

  In addition, the addition display of the prize ball count image C accompanying the small hit is a sub-control of the second big prize entry ball command sent from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game ball by the second big prize opening sensor 35a. The sub-control unit 90 receives a small hitting opening command (see S2066 in FIG. 38) transmitted from the main control unit 80. Since these are performed based on the above, these effects correspond to the small hit game effects (S4407, S4408).

  In the production mode C (state C), the winning probability (small hit probability) of the small hit in the second special symbol determination is very high (“420/630” = “1 / 1.5”), and the small hit game is Since there is a high possibility that it will be executed a plurality of times in succession, the stop in the first stop mode of the effect design 8 and the display of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of red symbols) occur frequently, and with this, the small size The addition display of the winning ball count image C and the character effect display in the winning game can also be executed with high frequency. For this reason, it is possible to strongly impress the player on the occurrence of the small hits by linking the effect symbol game effects (variation effects) and the small hit game effects. As a result, it is possible to raise the expectation of winning a prize ball (increased possession) due to frequent small hits, and to enhance the gaming interest of the production mode C (state C). It should be noted that the character effect display accompanying the small hit is performed based on the fact that the sub control unit 90 receives the second big prize winning ball entry command from the main control unit 80 as in the addition display of the prize ball count image C. You may comprise as follows. In this case, if the game ball does not enter the second grand prize opening 35 in the small hit game, the character effect is not performed. Therefore, when the game ball enters the second big prize opening 35, It is possible to make a strong impression on the player, and it becomes easy to determine whether or not the game ball has entered the second big prize opening 35 in the small hit game.

[Consecutive production for small hits]
As described above, the state C is a gaming state in which the small hit probability in the second special symbol success / failure determination is very high, and the possibility that the small hit game is continuously executed a plurality of times is extremely high. In the present embodiment, as an effect utilizing the game nature in which such a small hit game is continuously executed a plurality of times, “small” indicating a continuous execution of the small hit game (continuous occurrence of the small hit game) is suggested. The “winning continuous effect” (predetermined effect) can be executed.

  Note that “a small hit game is continuously executed a plurality of times” means, for example, that the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is a small hit continuously for a plurality of times (two times or more). When continuously executed multiple times, the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is intermittently a small hit such as “small hit → out → small hit” so that the small hit game is executed multiple times intermittently. If it is, the second special figure hold stored within the range of the upper limit of the number of special figure 2 held balls (in this example, “4”) is a hold (“small hit hold”) that triggers the execution of the small hit game. Multiple times (two or more) are included, and a small hit game is executed continuously within a certain period, such as when a small hit game is executed based on digestion of the plurality of small hit holds. Or, it is executed intermittently (substantially continuously).

  In this embodiment, while the second special symbol is variably displayed in the state C, the small hit (second specific result) continues two or more times as the display result of the variability display (result of the second special symbol success / failure determination). When the small hit game is continuously executed twice or more, it is possible to output a predetermined effect sound from the speaker 67 when at least the first small hit game is executed. ing. In addition, after the performance sound is output when the small hit game is executed (after the small hit continuous performance is executed), when the small hit game is continuously executed a plurality of times (two times or more), the subsequent small hit game It is also possible to output a predetermined effect sound. The output of such a production sound corresponds to a small hit continuous production. Furthermore, when the big hit hold is included in the second special figure hold stored when the small hit game is executed, the small hit continuous effect can be prevented from being executed. As the execution control of such a small hit continuous effect, the effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to be able to execute the small hit continuous effect related processing (S6000) shown in FIG. Hereinafter, the small hits continuous production related process (S6000) will be described. The small hit continuous effect is a kind of small hit game effect based on the aforementioned hit game effect process (S4408), and the small hit continuous effect related process (S6000) is executed in the hit game effect process (S4408). One control process to be performed.

[Small hit continuous production related processing]
66 is executed based on reception of a small hitting opening command (see S2066 in FIG. 38) transmitted from the main control unit 80. That is, the small hit continuous effect related process (S6000) is a process executed at the start of execution of the small hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 66, in the small hit continuous effect related processing (S6000), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit continuous flag is OFF (S6001). Here, the small hit continuous flag indicates whether or not the small hit game is continuously executed (also referred to as “small hit continuous period”). This small hit continuation flag is turned ON by S6006 described later and turned OFF by S6015 described later.

  If it is determined in S6001 that the small hit continuous flag is OFF (YES in S6001), it is determined whether or not a small lottery continuous effect execution lottery is won (S6002). In the present embodiment, winning in the small lot continuous production execution lottery is defined as one condition for executing the small hit continuous production. Specifically, as a random number for determining the effect, a random number for determining the continuous execution of small hits is provided, acquiring the random number in S6002, and determining the acquired value based on a lottery table (not shown), Perform lottery (random number lottery) for small-lot continuous production. As a result, if you did not win the lottery continuous lottery (decided) (NO in S6002), if you finished this process without performing the processing of S6003 to S6008, and won (YES in S6002), S6003 Proceed to the process.

  In S6003, the storage content (special drawing 2 effect hold information) of the above-described special figure 2 effect hold information storage area is checked (S6003). By checking the stored contents (special drawing 2 effect hold information) of the special figure 2 effect hold information storage area, it is possible to determine the pre-determined result of the special figure 2 special figure hold that is currently stored.

  As a result of the processing of S6003, among the second special figure holds currently stored (at the start of the small hit game), at least the second special figure hold that is first digested after the end of the current small hit game is the small hit hold. In other words, that is, a case where a small hit game is continuously executed twice or more including the small hit game started this time (continuous number of small hits ≧ 2) (YES in S6004), and is currently stored If the second special figure hold does not include the big hit hold (YES in S6005), the small hit game counter is set (S6006), the small hit continuous flag is turned ON (S6007), and the first The sound data of the production sound is set (S6008), and this process ends.

  Here, the small hit game counter executes the second and subsequent small hit games determined at the time of the determination when it is determined in S6004 that the small hit game is continuously executed twice or more. It is a counter which counts. For example, the number of the second special figure hold (the number of special figure 2 reserved balls) stored at the time of the start of the small hit game is “4”, of which the second corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved ball number “1”. If special figure hold (hold 1) is small hit hold and other second special figure hold (hold 2 to hold 4) is off hold, after the small hit game that is started (executed) this time (second time) Since the number of small hit games executed after “1” is “1”, the value “1” is set in the small hit game counter in S6006. In addition, the special figure 2 reserved ball number at the time of the start of the small hit game is “4”, of which the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved ball numbers “1” and “2” (hold 1, hold 2) Is a small hit and the other 2nd special figure hold (hold 3 and hold 4) is a missed hold, the small executed after the small hit game that is started (executed) this time (after the second) Since the number of executions of the hit game is “2”, the value “2” is set to the small hit game counter in S6006. The value of the small hit game counter set in this way is decremented by 1 in S6009 to be described later by starting the second and subsequent small hit games.

  Further, when the sound data of the first effect sound is set in S6008, the first effect sound based on the sound data is output from the speaker 67 as the small hit game is executed this time. This first effect sound is the first jackpot if it is determined that the jackpot game will be executed continuously twice or more in the situation where there is no jackpot hold (no jackpot is generated). It will be output as the game is executed. Therefore, for the player, when the small hit game is executed, the first effect sound is output, so that two or more small hit games including the small hit game are continuously executed. Become able to recognize. That is, the first effect sound is an effect (small hit continuous effect) suggesting that two or more small hit games are continuously executed.

  Here, as described above, when the small hit game is executed, the second big winning opening 35 (big winning opening for small hits) is opened 6 times for 0.3 seconds, and is opened for a total of 1.8 seconds. Therefore, in this embodiment, the second big winning opening 35 (small winning big winning opening) is first opened at the time of the small hit game (first opening timing), and the small hit continuous production is related. Production sound can be output (generated). Note that the output timing of the production sound related to the small hit continuous production (execution timing of the small hit continuous production) is not limited to this, and for example, the first (first ball) game to the second big prize opening 35 During the display of changes in the timing of entering a ball (entrance detection) and the special symbol (second special symbol in this example) that triggers the execution (start) of the small hit game, this triggers the execution (start) of the small hit game Any timing related to the execution of the small hit game such as the stop display timing of the small hit symbol may be used. In other words, from the start of the change display of the special symbol (second special symbol in this example) that triggers the execution (start) of the small hit game (digestion of the small hit hold), after the end of the change (after the small hit symbol stop display) It is possible to set the execution timing of the small hit continuous effect at a predetermined time until the end of the small hit game.

  Further, in this embodiment, as the production sound related to the small hit continuous production, a predetermined voice is output (generated) in the voice color of any one of the male characters B1 to B5 and the female characters L1 to L5. The voice is configured to be the voice color of the character (resident character) according to the result of the character selection (setting) in the state A described above (the selection result by the character selection process (S4306)). Since the game state shifts to the state C because at least the big hit (initial hit) in the state A is a trigger, in this embodiment, the result of the character selection in the state A is reflected in the small hit continuous production. The voice of the character according to the result is output. As a result, it is possible to execute the small hit continuous effect (predetermined effect) when the small hit game is continuously executed in the state C in a manner reflecting the selection result by the player. It is possible to enhance the taste of the production. The small hit continuous effect can be executed in a predetermined manner that does not reflect the selection result by the player.

  The effect sound relating to the small hit continuous effect of the present embodiment is provided with two types of the first effect sound and the second effect sound, and the male character described above for each of the first effect sound and the second effect sound. Acoustic data corresponding to each voice color of B1 to B5 and female characters L1 to L5 is stored in the ROM of the sub control board 90. The first effect sound is “GO!” (Go) sound, and the second effect sound is “GO! GO!” (Go go) sound. Therefore, in S6008, the voice data of “GO!” (Go) (acoustic data of the first effect sound) based on the voice color of the resident character is set, and the voice of “GO!” (Go) (first effect sound) is set. This is output with the opening of the first second big prize opening 35 in the current (first) small hit game. Through the voice of “GO!” (Go), the player recognizes that the small hit game continues two or more times. Thereby, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest in the continuous execution of the small hit game of two or more times (multiple times), and to improve the game interest.

  On the other hand, in the above-mentioned S6004, the small hit game including the current small hit game is not continuously executed twice or more (the second special figure hold that is first digested after the current small hit game ends) When it is determined that it is not a small hit hold (NO in S6004), or when it is determined in S6005 that the second special figure hold currently stored includes a big hit hold (in S6005) NO), the process ends without performing the processes of S6006 to S6008. In these cases, the first effect sound is not output (the small hit continuous effect is not executed).

  Here, if a positive determination is made in S6004, but a negative determination is made in S6005, that is, a big hit hold is stored in the second special figure hold in a situation where a small hit game is continuously executed twice or more. In this case, although the small hit game is continuously executed twice or more, the small hit continuous effect (output of the first effect sound) is not executed. The jackpots related to the second special figure are “15R fifth jackpot”, “2R sixth jackpot” and “2R seventh jackpot” as mentioned above, and “15R fifth jackpot” is the game after the jackpot game. The state is a big hit with state C (high probability low base state), and “2R sixth big hit” and “2R seventh big hit” indicate that the gaming state after big hit gaming is state B (low probability high base state or high probability high accuracy) It is a big hit that becomes the base state (see FIG. 6). Therefore, when it is determined in S6005 that the second special figure hold is included in the big hit hold (NO in S6005), those "15R fifth big hit", "2R sixth big hit" and "2R seventh big hit Is stored. If the big hit hold is the “15R fifth big hit” hold, the game in the state C that is advantageous to the player can be continued after the big hit game, and “2R sixth big hit” or “2R seventh big hit” ", The game moves to state B after the big hit game, and the game in state C ends. For this reason, for the player, although the small hit game is continuously executed twice or more, the first effect sound is not output at that time (the small hit continuous effect is not executed). This is an indication of the presence of a big hit reservation according to any of “5th big hit”, “2R sixth big hit” and “2R seventh big hit”. Therefore, in the state C, if the output of the first effect sound (small hit continuous effect) is not executed even though the small hit game has continued two or more times, the player will receive “15R jackpot occurrence” and There is a possibility of “continuation of state C” or a pinch of “occurrence of 2R jackpot” and “end of state C”. As a result, when the small hit game is executed twice or more continuously (continuously), it is possible to suggest the subsequent game development by not executing the small hit continuous effect, It is possible to draw attention to the player.

  If an affirmative determination is made in S6004 and a negative determination is made in S6005 (YES in S6004, NO in S6005), a lottery continuous lottery execution lottery is performed in the same manner as in S6002, and the execution lottery is won. In this case, the processing of S6006 to S6008 may be performed. In this case, even if the big hit hold is stored in the second special figure hold when the small hit game is continuously executed two or more times, the first effect sound is output from the speaker 67. . As a result, if the small hit continuous effect is not executed when the small hit game is continuously executed twice or more, the big hit hold according to any of the 15R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit and 2R seventh big hit Is not always stored ”, and“ when the small hit continuous effect is executed when the small hit game is continuously executed twice or more, the 15R fifth big hit, 2R first Since it is not necessarily said that the big hit holding according to either the 6 big hits or the 2R seventh big hit is not stored, it is possible to give a wide range of game play.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S6001 that the small hit continuous flag is not OFF (ON) (YES in S6001), that is, during the small hit continuous period, the first effect at the time of the execution of the first small hit game When the small hit game after the sound has already been output (second and subsequent small hit games) is executed (started), the small hit game counter is decremented by 1 (S6009). The small hit continuous effect related processing (S6000) is executed at the start of the small hit game (based on the reception of the small hit opening command) as described above. It is a counter which counts the execution of the small hit game after the second time. Therefore, it is determined in S6001 that the small hit continuous flag is not OFF (ON) when the sub-control unit 90 receives the small hit opening command in the small hit continuous period, that is, in the small hit continuous period. Since this is the timing at which the second and subsequent small hit games are started, in step S6009, the small hit game counter is decremented by one.

  Next, in S6010, it is determined whether or not the value (count value) of the small hit game counter after subtraction is “0” (S6010). As a result, when it is determined that it is “0” (YES in S6010), the small hit continuation flag is turned OFF (S6016), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not “0” (NO in S6010), that is, if the value of the small hit game counter is “1” or more, the same as S6003 described above, The stored content (special drawing 2 production hold information) is checked (S6011). Here, after the processing of S6009, if the value of the small hit game counter is not "0" ("1" or more), after the current (second and subsequent) small hit games, one more small hit The game has been executed. Such a situation is stored, for example, when the value “2” or more is set in the small hit game counter in the above-described S6006, that is, at the first small hit game start time (time of S6004) within the small hit continuous period. If the second special figure hold corresponding to at least the special figure 2 holding ball numbers “1” and “2” is the small hit hold among the second special figure hold being made (the small hit game is continuously three times or more) Can occur).

  As a result of checking the special figure 2 effect on hold information by S6011, two or more small hit holds are included in the second special figure hold currently stored (at the start of the second and subsequent small hit games) (S6012). If the second special figure hold currently stored does not include the big hit hold (YES in S6013), the small hit game counter is reset (overwritten) (S6014), 2 Set the sound data of the effect sound (S6015), and finish this process.

  Here, the determination in S6012 is whether or not two or more small hits hold are included in the second special figure hold stored at that time, and two or more small hit holds are included. In this case, it is irrelevant whether or not the small hits are continuously held. That is, it is determined whether or not the small hit game is executed two or more times within the (remaining) second special figure hold stored at that time. In this embodiment, since the upper limit of the second special figure hold that can be stored is “4”, at the time when the determination of S6012 is made, a maximum of four second special figure hold is consumed (four times). If it is determined that two or more small hit games will be executed continuously or intermittently during the second special figure change), the determination result of S6012 is affirmative. In S6014, a value equal to the stored number of small hits held when it is determined in S6012 that two or more small hits are included (exists) is set (overwritten) in the small hit game counter. .

  In addition, when the sound data of the second effect sound is set in S6015, the second effect sound based on the sound data (in this example, “GO! GO!” Voice) is accompanied by the execution of the small hit game this time. Output from the speaker 67. This second effect sound is determined when two or more small hit games are executed when the second and subsequent small hit games are started in a situation where there is no big hit hold (no big hit occurs). If it is, it is output with the execution of the small hit game that is started. Therefore, for the player, the second effect sound is output when the small hit game is executed, so that after the small hit game, two or more small hit games (including the current small hit game are 3 It is possible to recognize that a small hit game of more than times) is executed. That is, the second effect sound is an effect (small hit continuous effect) suggesting that three or more small hit games are executed in the small hit continuous period.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the above-described S6012 that two or more small hits hold is not included in the currently stored second special figure hold (NO in S6012), or the above-mentioned S6013 When it is determined that the big hit hold is included in the currently stored second special figure hold (NO in S6013), the small hit continuous flag is turned OFF without performing the processing of S6014 and S6015. (S6016), and this process ends. At this time, the small hit game counter is reset (initialized). In this case, the second effect sound is not output in the small hit game in the small hit continuous period (the small hit continuous effect is not executed). Therefore, for the player, as the recognition through the small hit consecutive effects, the player can only recognize “continuation of two or more small hit games” by the first effect sound. In addition, when a negative determination is made in S6013 (when a big hit hold is included in the second special figure hold), the second effect sound is not output (the small hit continuous effect is not executed) as described above. The purpose is the same as when a negative determination is made in S6005.

  With reference to FIG. 67, a transition example of the game when the small hit continuous effect is executed in the state C under the above small hit continuous effect related processing (S6000) will be described. FIG. 67 shows a correspondence relationship between “game situation (game situation)”, “second special figure holding storage situation”, “small hit game counter setting situation”, and “small hit continuous effect execution situation” in state C. (Transition) is shown in chronological order from top to bottom.

  First, as shown in FIG. 67 (a), while the game progresses in a state where the small hit consecutive period has not yet occurred in the state C (a situation where the small hit continuous effect has not yet been executed), the second special The number of stored second special figure hold when the symbol is displayed as a small hit symbol is “4”, of which the second special figure hold corresponding to “hold 1” is “small hit hold”. It is assumed that the second special figure hold corresponding to “2” to “hold 4” is “off hold” (see situation 1 in the figure). In this case, at the start of the small hit game related to the stop display of the small hit symbol, the value “1” is set in the small hit game counter (S6006), and the first effect sound is set (S6008). When the small hit game (first time) related to the stop display of the small hit symbol is started, the first effect sound is output in accordance with the opening of the first second big winning opening 35 in the small hit game. (See situation 2 in the figure). Through the first effect sound, the player can recognize that the small hit game is continuously executed (two consecutive small hits) by digesting the next second special figure hold (hold 1).

  After that, when the first small hit game is finished, the second special symbol hold “Hot 1” small hit hold is digested and the second special symbol variation display is started, which is stored at that time. The second special figure hold is shifted, and the storage status of the second special figure hold is “Hold 1” to “Hold 3” are all “off hold”, and “Hold 4” does not exist (the situation in FIG. 3). Then, until the second special symbol stops and displays with the small hit symbol after the change display, a new second special symbol hold (holding 4) based on the entrance to the third starting port 26 occurs, and the second special symbol is retained. 2. Assume that the special figure hold is “small hit hold” (see situation 4 in the figure). In this case, at the start of the small hit game (second time) related to the stop display of the small hit symbol, 1 is subtracted from the small hit game counter (S6009), and the value of the counter becomes “0”. In addition, since there is only one small hit hold in the second special figure hold stored at this time (NO in S6012), the small hit game counter remains at the value “0”. In the second small hit game based on the current small hit reservation, the first effect sound is not output (see situation 5 in the figure). After that, while the game in the state C progresses, the small hit continuous effect can be executed by the situation where the small hit is continuously generated twice or more.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), while the game progresses in a state where the small hit continuous period has not yet occurred in the state C (a state where the small hit continuous effect has not yet been executed), When the special symbol is stopped and displayed with the small hit symbol, the number of stored second special figure holds is “4”, and the second special figure hold corresponding to “Take 1” and “Take 2” is “Small Hit” respectively. It is assumed that the second special figure hold corresponding to “hold 3” and “hold 4” is “off hold” (see situation 1 in the figure). In this case, at the start of the small hit game related to the stop display of the small hit symbol, the value “2” is set in the small hit game counter (S6006), and the first effect sound is set (S6008). Then, when the small hit game (first time) related to the stop display of the small hit symbol is started, the first effect sound is output in accordance with the opening of the first second big winning opening 35 in the small hit game. (See situation 2 in the figure). Through this first effect sound, the player can recognize that the small hit game is continuously performed (two consecutive small hits) by digesting the next second special figure hold (hold 1).

  After that, when the first small hit game is finished, the second special symbol hold “Hot 1” small hit hold is digested and the second special symbol variation display is started, which is stored at that time. The second special figure hold is shifted, and the storage status of the second special figure hold is “hold 1” is “small hit hold”, “hold 2” and “hold 3” are “off hold”, and “hold 4” is The state does not exist (see situation 3 in the figure). Then, until the second special symbol stops and displays with the small hit symbol after the change display, a new second special symbol hold (holding 4) based on the entrance to the third starting port 26 occurs, and the second special symbol is retained. 2. Assume that the special figure hold is “small hit hold” (see situation 4 in the figure). In this case, at the start of the small hit game (second time) related to the stop display of the small hit symbol, 1 is subtracted from the small hit game counter (S6009), and the value of the counter becomes “1”. In addition, since there are two small hits holds in the second special figure hold stored at this time (YES in S6012), the value “2” is reset (overwritten) in the small hit game counter (S6014). ), The second effect sound is set (S6015). Then, in the second small hit game based on the current small hit reservation, the second effect sound is output in accordance with the opening of the first second big winning opening 35 (see situation 5 in the figure). Through this second effect sound, the player can recognize that at least two small hit games are executed by using the currently stored second special figure hold.

  After that, when the second small hit game is finished, the second special symbol hold “Hot 1” small hit hold is digested and the second special symbol variation display is started, which is stored at that time. The second special figure hold is shifted, and the storage status of the second special figure hold is “hold 1” and “hold 2” are “off hold”, “hold 3” is “small hit hold”, and “hold 4” is The state does not exist (see situation 6 in the figure). Then, until the second special symbol stops and displays with the small hit symbol after the change display, a new second special symbol hold (holding 4) based on the ball entering the third starting port 26 is generated, and the second special symbol is retained. 2. Assume that the special figure hold is “small hit hold” (see situation 7 in the figure). In this case, at the start of the small hit game (third time) related to the stop display of the small hit symbol, 1 is subtracted from the small hit game counter (S6009), and the value of the counter becomes “1”. In addition, since there are two small hits holds in the second special figure hold stored at this time (YES in S6012), the value “2” is reset (overwritten) in the small hit game counter (S6014). ), The second effect sound is set (S6015). Then, in the third small hit game based on the current small hit reservation, the second effect sound is output in accordance with the opening of the first second big winning opening 35 (see situation 8 in the figure). Through this second effect sound, the player can recognize that at least two small hit games are executed by using the currently stored second special figure hold. Even after this, there is a possibility that the second effect sound is output every time the small hit game is executed due to the constant occurrence of the small hit hold based on the ball entering the third start opening 26.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (c), while the game progresses in a state in which the small hit continuous period has not yet occurred in the state C (a state in which the small hit continuous effect has not yet been executed), When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit symbol, the number of the second special symbol hold is “4”, and the second special figure hold corresponding to “Hold 1” to “Hold 3” is “Small hit”, respectively. It is assumed that the second special figure hold corresponding to “hold 4” is “off hold” (refer to situation 1 in the figure). In this case, at the start of the small hit game related to the stop display of the small hit symbol, the value “3” is set in the small hit game counter (S6006), and the first effect sound is set (S6008). When the small hit game (first time) related to the stop display of the small hit symbol is started, the first effect sound is output in accordance with the opening of the first second big winning opening 35 in the small hit game. (See situation 2 in the figure). Through the first effect sound, the player can recognize that the small hit game is continuously executed (two consecutive small hits) by digesting the next second special figure hold (hold 1).

  After that, when the first small hit game is finished and the small special hold of “Hold 1” of the second special figure hold is consumed and the variable display of the second special symbol is started, it is stored at that time. The second special figure hold is shifted, and the storage status of the second special figure hold is “hold 1” and “hold 2” are “small hit hold”, “hold 3” is “off hold”, and “hold 4” is The state does not exist (see situation 3 in the figure). Then, until the second special symbol stops and displays with the small hit symbol after the change display, a new second special symbol hold (holding 4) based on the entrance to the third starting port 26 occurs, and the second special symbol is retained. 2. Assume that the special figure hold is “small hit hold” (see situation 4 in the figure). In this case, at the start of the small hit game (second time) related to the stop display of the small hit symbol, 1 is subtracted from the small hit game counter (S6009), and the value of the counter becomes “2”. In addition, since there are three small hit holds in the second special figure hold stored at this time (YES in S6012), the value “3” is reset (overwritten) in the small hit game counter (S6014). ), The second effect sound is set (S6015). Then, in the second small hit game based on the current small hit reservation, the second effect sound is output in accordance with the opening of the first second big winning opening 35 (see situation 5 in the figure). Through this second effect sound, the player can recognize that at least two small hit games are executed by using the currently stored second special figure hold.

  After that, when the second small hit game is finished, the second special symbol hold “Hot 1” small hit hold is digested and the second special symbol variation display is started, which is stored at that time. The second special figure hold is shifted, and the storage status of the second special figure hold is “hold 1” for “small hold”, “hold 2” for “off hold”, and “hold 3” for “small hit hold”. , “Hold 4” does not exist (see situation 6 in the figure). Then, until the second special symbol stops and displays with the small hit symbol after the change display, a new second special symbol hold (holding 4) based on the ball entering the third starting port 26 is generated, and the second special symbol is retained. 2. Assume that the special figure hold is “off hold” (see situation 7 in the figure). In this case, at the start of the small hit game (third time) related to the stop display of the small hit symbol, 1 is subtracted from the small hit game counter (S6009), and the value of the counter becomes “2”. In addition, since there are two small hits holds in the second special figure hold stored at this time (YES in S6012), the value “2” is reset (overwritten) in the small hit game counter (S6014). ), The second effect sound is set (S6015). Then, in the third small hit game based on the current small hit reservation, the second effect sound is output in accordance with the opening of the first second big winning opening 35 (see situation 8 in the figure). Through this second effect sound, the player can recognize that at least two small hit games are executed by using the currently stored second special figure hold. Even after this, there is a possibility that the second effect sound is output every time the small hit game is executed due to the constant occurrence of the small hit hold based on the ball entering the third start opening 26.

  As described above, three examples of FIGS. 67 (a) to 67 (c) have been described as transition examples of the game when the small hit continuous effect is executed in the state C. As is clear from these transition examples, as shown in FIG. When a situation where the small hit game is continuously executed twice or more occurs and the small hit continuous effect is executed in the first small hit game (the first effect sound is output), As long as the situation where there are two or more small hits hold at the start of the second and subsequent small hit games continues, the small hit continuous effect is executed in each small hit game (the second effect sound is output) It becomes. For this reason, for the player, when the first effect sound is output together with the execution (start) of the small hit game, the second effect sound is output every time the small hit game is executed. It is possible to recognize that the situation (continuous period of small hits) continues (addition of continuous period of small hits). As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of the game in the state C by enhancing the production effect and interest by continuously executing the small hit game a plurality of times.

  Note that the game transition examples shown in FIGS. 67 (a) to 67 (c) are merely examples, and it is needless to say that other transitions may be traced.

  In the state C (specific game state), the execution frequency of the small hit game is higher than that in the other game states (state A and state B), and the small hit probability in the second special symbol determination is very high. (In this example, “1 / 1.5”). By making it possible to execute the small hit continuous effect in such a state C, the state C becomes a gaming state in which the small hit continuous effect is easily executed. Thereby, it becomes possible to increase the interest of the state C by increasing the chance that the player comes into contact with the small hit continuous performance.

  Further, in this embodiment, the content of the effect sound output in the first small hit game (first effect sound) and the content of the effect sound output in the second and subsequent small hit games in the small hit consecutive period. (Second effect sound) is different, and the number of executions of the small hit game increases, so that the content (effect mode) of the effect sound output with the small hit game changes. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the continuous small hit game and to attract the player's attention to the continuous execution of the small hit game.

  In this embodiment, the effect sound output in the first small hit game is the first effect sound ("GO!" Sound), and the effect sound output in the second and subsequent small hit games is the second. Although the production sound (“GO! GO!” Voice) is used, regarding the second and subsequent small hit games, the production sound may be further varied (changed) as the number of executions increases. For example, during the small hit consecutive period, the second effect sound (for example, “GO! GO!” Sound) is used for the second to fourth small hit games, and the third effect sound (for example, “GO! GO!” Is used for the fifth to seventh small hit games. The number of executions of small hit games that are continuously executed, such as the fourth effect sound (for example, the voice of “Ikeike!”) In the eighth to tenth small hit games. It may be configured to output a production sound in a mode corresponding to the number of times. In this way, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the small hit continuous performance, and it is possible to more effectively direct the continuous execution of the small hit game.

  In the present embodiment, a predetermined effect sound is output from the speaker 67 as a small hit continuous effect, but the small hit continuous effect is not limited to such a sound effect. For example, a display effect for displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device, a light effect for causing an electric decoration member such as a panel lamp or a frame lamp to emit light in a predetermined mode, and a movable decorative member (movable accessory, gimmick) in a predetermined mode It is possible to constitute a small hit continuous effect by effects other than sound effects, such as a movable effect operated by. Moreover, it is possible to constitute a small hit continuous effect by one or more effects among these effects.

  In the above-described embodiment, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the effect symbol display unit are set according to the game state as a special symbol (the first to be described later) set in the game state. The variable display is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol or the second special symbol. That is, one effect symbol (three digits) is displayed on the effect symbol display unit, and is synchronized with one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to the gaming state, thereby synchronizing with the first special symbol. And a case of being synchronized with the second special symbol. Instead of such a mode, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed, the fluctuation display of the first effect symbol is synchronized with the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, and the second effect symbol is changed to the second special symbol. The variable display may be performed in synchronization with the variable display. Further, when both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed, the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (one special symbol) set as the main subject of the game in the gaming state is largely displayed (main subject) The effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (the other special symbol) that is not the main subject of the game may be displayed small. Specifically, the display area is 1/5 or less. Also, not always displaying both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol, but displaying both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol according to the gaming state and the game situation, and the first There may be a case where one of the effect symbol and the second effect symbol (the main symbol) is displayed.

  In addition to the above-described configuration of the gaming machine, a “variable entrance” that can be changed between a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter, and a state where the game ball cannot enter, “Special game execution means” capable of executing a special game that allows the variable entrance to enter the ball when the result of the 1-win / no-win determination or the second win-win determination is successful. In addition, the “second starter” may be a variable starter that can be changed between the first mode and the second mode in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first mode. In addition, a game state (first game state) in which a game ball enters the variable start port has a predetermined frequency, and a game in which a game ball enters the variable start port is higher than the game state. “Game state setting means” for setting the state (second game state) may be provided. Here, “predetermined frequency” includes zero.

  In the above-described embodiment, the number of times of opening the first grand prize port or the second grand prize port in one round is set to one, but the number of times of opening the first grand prize port or the second grand prize port in one round is set. It may be a plurality of times or may have a different number of rounds of opening. In the present embodiment, the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold are control processes that can be changed simultaneously, but the second special figure hold is given priority over the first special figure hold. Also, a so-called special figure 2 priority control process, a control process in which the first special figure reservation is prioritized over the second special figure reservation, or a so-called special figure 1 priority control process may be used. In addition, the priority order is not set for the digestion of the first special figure hold and the digestion of the second special figure hold, and the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold are digested in order from the oldest stored one. Control processing, that is, control processing of so-called order of entering (memory order) digestion may be used.

  Also, it is a type of pachinko gaming machine that does not have a probability setting means (no high probability state), has a specific area inside, and can enter a game ball that can enter and a game ball can enter There is a large winning opening that can be changed to an impossible entry impossible state, and if the result of the determination of success or failure based on the entry to the starting opening is a small hit, the large winning opening is made available for a predetermined time. This is also applied to a pachinko gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed when a game ball enters a big winning opening in a ball ready state and the game ball passes through a specific area, and a big hit game is executed. This pachinko gaming machine is called a so-called “1 type 2 type mixing machine”. When the result of the determination of success / failure based on the ball entering the start opening becomes a big hit, the big hit game is executed without passing through a specific area. In addition, as a privilege, it is possible to generate a high base state that increases the frequency of entering game balls into the start opening. Moreover, it has a 1st starting port and a 2nd starting port, and it shall generate | occur | produce the high base state which raises the entrance frequency to the 2nd starting port. The present invention can be applied to all these types of gaming machines.

  In the above-described embodiment, the probability of hitting can be set to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) by the non-operation / operation of the probability variation function. Is not limited to this. For example, three or more types of probabilities can be set, such as a medium probability (third probability) higher than a low probability (first probability) and lower than a high probability (second probability). Also good. Furthermore, the first low probability and the first high probability (first probability condition), the second low probability and the second high probability (second probability condition), the third low probability and the third high probability (third probability condition), etc. A plurality of types of probability conditions that define the relationship between a low probability and a high probability are provided, and any one of the plurality of types of probability conditions can be arbitrarily set (selectable), for example, when the gaming machine is turned on. Also good.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) stored in the special figure holding storage unit is read and the acquired acquired random number value (acquired information) is determined for the prior determination based on the starting entry. Although (pre-determination) is performed ("starting ball entry process (S205)", see FIGS. 11, 13, etc.), the pre-determination method is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special figure hold storage unit, an area (acquisition information storage means) for storing acquisition information (that is, acquisition information acquired based on starting entry) that is a target of prior determination is set as a main control unit or sub-control. The acquired information stored in the storage area (preliminary determination storage unit) may be determined (preliminary determination). In this case, it is possible to erase the acquisition information (acquisition information stored in another storage area) used for the preliminary determination by storing the result of the preliminary determination in the RAM of the main control unit or the sub-control unit. Or it is good also as what pre-determines about the acquisition information acquired based on starting entrance instead of pre-determining about the acquisition information memorize | stored in the special figure holding | maintenance memory | storage part. That is, it may be determined in advance before the acquired information is stored in the special figure storage unit. In this case, it is not necessary to provide an area for storing the acquisition information to be subjected to prior determination separately from the special figure storage unit, and it is also necessary to read out the acquisition information stored in the special figure storage unit for the preliminary determination. Absent.

  In the embodiment described above, one image display device 7 (board-side display means) is provided as the main liquid crystal (main display device) on the game board side (inside the game area), and the game machine frame side (outside the game area). ) Is provided with two image display devices 71 and 72 (frame side display means) as sub liquid crystal (sub display device), but the sub liquid crystal (sub display device) may be provided on the game board 2 side. In this case, instead of the two sub liquid crystals (the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72) shown in the above-mentioned embodiment, the two sub liquid crystals are used as the main liquid crystal (first image display) as a panel side display means. Provide one sub liquid crystal on the game board side instead of one of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (left sub liquid crystal or right sub liquid crystal). Can do. Alternatively, it is possible to provide one or two or more sub liquid crystals on the game board side while providing the two sub liquid crystals (second image display device 71 and third image display device 72) shown in the above-described embodiment. is there. This also makes it possible to display various effects with impact by a plurality of image display devices.

  In the above-described embodiment, the display device (first image display device 7) provided on the game board side (inside the game area) and the display device (second image) provided on the gaming machine frame side (outside the game area). The display device 71 and the third image display device 72) are all image display devices composed of liquid crystal display devices (liquid crystal display devices), but the type of display device is not limited to liquid crystal, and for example, a drum display device, A dot display, a 7-segment display, or the like can also be used. Further, different types of display devices including a main display device and a sub display device may be mixed. Specifically, for example, among the first to third image display devices shown in the above-described embodiments, the first image display device 7 is a drum display or a 7-segment display, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device are used. The image display device 72 may be a liquid crystal display as in the embodiment. Alternatively, the first image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display as in the embodiment, and one or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may be a dot display. As a result, a variety of effects can be displayed by a plurality of display devices having different display methods, and it is possible to enhance the gaming interest.

[Others]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (examples) disclosed in this specification are disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference invention 1)
A conventional gaming machine has a first start port, a second start port, a first grand prize port, and a second grand prize port. When a game ball enters the first start port, the first symbol is variably displayed. 2. When a game ball entered the start opening, there was a display that variably displayed the second symbol. Then, when the first symbol or the second symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, either the first big prize opening or the second big prize opening is opened, or the first big prize opening and the second big prize are opened. There has been a gaming machine that executes a jackpot game in which a winning opening is opened in a predetermined order (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-055811).

  In addition, in the conventional gaming machine, the second start port is a variable start port, the entry frequency is lowered in the low base state, and the entry frequency is increased in the high base state. There was a game aimed at one starting port and a game aimed at the second starting port in a high base state. In addition, there has been a gaming machine that performs a so-called right-handed game in which a game is aimed at the right area of the game area when a big hit game or a high base state is reached. In such a gaming machine, a left-handed game is played in the low base state, and once the advantageous state is reached, the right-handed game is played until the advantageous state ends, and the game in the advantageous state is sharpened. Met. However, in the conventional gaming machine, the transition state of the gaming state is uniform, and it has not been possible to provide highly interesting gaming properties.

  The present reference invention 1 has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and unlike conventional gaming machines, provides a highly interesting gaming state, diversifies the transition state of the gaming state, and enhances the gaming interest. A game machine is provided.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is
A first starting port through which a game ball can enter,
A second start port that is changeable between a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state;
A third start opening where game balls can enter;
First hit / fail judgment execution means for executing a first hit / no-go judgment based on a ball entering the first start port or the second start port;
Second hit / fail judgment execution means for executing a second hit / no-go judgment executed based on a ball entering the third start port;
A first gaming state in which a game ball enters the second starting port at a predetermined frequency, and a second gaming state in which a gaming ball enters the second starting port at a higher frequency than the first gaming state. , A game state setting means capable of setting,
A gaming machine comprising special game execution means capable of executing a special game when the result of the first success / failure determination or the second success / failure determination is a big hit (first specified result), wherein the first start The mouth is provided in the first game area,
The second start port and the third start port are provided in the second game area,
In the first game state, a first game (low-low-low base state) is executed by launching a game ball in the first game area and mainly performing the first success / failure determination, and in the second game state, the second game. A second game (low-accuracy base state) in which a game ball is fired in an area and executed mainly as a result of the first success / failure determination; and a game ball is fired in the second game area in the first game state to And a third game (highly accurate and low base state) that is executed mainly by determining whether or not the player is correct.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first start port for executing the first winning / failing determination is arranged in the first gaming area, and the first winning / failing determination is executed in the second gaming area (the first state and the second state). A variable type second start port and a third start port for executing the second determination of whether or not it is present. In addition, the gaming state includes a first gaming state in which the frequency of entering game balls into the second starting port is low (a predetermined frequency) and a frequency of entering game balls into the second starting port than in the first gaming state. A high second gaming state. In the first gaming state, the first game that fires aiming at the first starting port of the first gaming area and executes the first winning / nothing determination as a main subject, and the second starting port of the second gaming area in the second gaming state The first game that fires aiming at the first game and executes the first hit / fail judgment as the subject, and the first game that launches aiming at the third start port of the second game area and executes the second hit / fail judgment as the subject 1 game.

  Thereby, the player can perform the first game, the second game, and the third game having different game modes according to the transition of the game state, and can enhance the game interest by changing the various game states and the new game characteristics. It becomes possible. In the first gaming state, the frequency of entering the first game area and entering the first starting port is higher than the frequency of entering the second starting area and launching into the second starting area. May be higher.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 1-1.
As a result of the first success / failure determination in the first game for firing a game ball in the first game area, the game has a first big hit and a second big hit,
As a result of the first success / failure determination in the second game for firing a game ball in the second game area, the game has a first big hit and a second big hit,
As a result of the second success / failure determination in the third game for firing a game ball in the second game area, the game has a third big hit and a fourth big hit,
In the first game, the second game can be executed when the result of the first success / failure determination becomes the first big hit, and the third game can be executed when the result of the first success / failure determination becomes the second big win. age,
In the second game, the second game can be executed when the result of the first success / failure determination becomes the first big hit, and the third game can be executed when the result of the first success / failure determination becomes the second big win. age,
In the third game, the second game can be executed when the result of the second success / failure determination is the third big hit, and the third game can be executed when the result of the second success / failure determination is the fourth big win. It is characterized by that.

  According to such a gaming machine, the result of the first winning / failing determination in the first game for firing the game ball in the first gaming area and the first winning / failing determination in the second game for firing the game ball in the second gaming area. As a result, there are a first big hit and a second big hit, and there are a third big hit and a fourth big hit as a result of the second hit / fail judgment in the third game in which a game ball is launched into the second game area. Then, in the first game after the game starts, the second game can be executed when the result of the first success / failure determination becomes the first big hit, and the third game can be executed when the second big hit. Also, when the second game is reached, the second game can be executed when the result of the first winning / failing determination in the second game becomes the first big hit, and the third game can be executed when the second big hit is reached. Also, in the case of the third game, the second game can be executed when the result of the second winning / failing determination in the third game becomes the third big hit, and the third game can be executed when the fourth big hit.

  Thus, regardless of whether the first big hit or the second big hit is caused by the first game after the start of the game, the subsequent game is played by firing the game ball to the second game area. In addition, while performing a game to be launched into the second game area, whether the second game or the third game is performed, the game for performing the first determination (second game), 2. It is possible to play a game while changing the game mode (game state) with the game (third game) in which the determination of success / failure is made. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the gaming interest by changing various gaming states and novel gaming characteristics.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 1-2,
In the second game, the second game state is changed to the first game state based on execution of the first success / failure determination a specific number of times, and the first game is shifted to the first game. .

  According to such a gaming machine, in the second game, when the first winning / failing determination is executed a specific number of times, the second gaming state is changed to the first gaming state, and the first game is shifted to. As a result, the second game is shifted to the first game by executing a specific number of determinations. Further, in a game in which the same first winning / failing determination is executed, the game is shifted from the launch game to the second game area to the launch game to the first game area. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the gaming interest by changing various gaming states and novel gaming characteristics.

  Note that the third game may continue the third game even when the second winning / failing determination is executed a specific number of times. In addition, the third game may continue the third game until the second winning / failing determination result is a big hit.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-3,
As a result of the second success / failure determination, there is a small hit (second specific result), and when the small hit is reached, a predetermined amount of gaming profit can be obtained,
The second success / failure determination is more likely to be the small hit than the first success / failure determination,
In the second game, the execution rate of the first success / failure determination is higher than that in the first game, so that the decrease rate of the game medium used for the game is slower than that in the first game.
The third game is characterized in that the rate of decrease of the game medium is slower than that of the second game because the game profit can be obtained by the small hit.

  According to such a gaming machine, as a result of the second success / failure determination, there is a small hit that can acquire a predetermined amount of gaming profit, and the second success / failure determination is smaller with a higher probability than the first success / failure determination. It will be a hit. That is, the third game is a small hit with a higher probability than the first game and the second game. In addition, the second game that is in the second gaming state has a higher execution frequency of the first winning / failing determination than the first game that is in the first gaming state. In the second game, the decrease rate of the game medium used for the game is slower than that of the first game, and in the third game, the decrease rate of the game medium used for the game is slower than that of the second game. Accordingly, the third game is a game that is more advantageous than the second game, and the second game is a game that is more advantageous than the first game. This also makes it possible to diversify transition modes between various gaming states with different degrees of advantage, and to enhance the gaming interest by using new gaming characteristics. In addition, it is good also as having a small hit as a result of a 2nd success / failure determination, and not having a small hit as a result of a 1st success / failure determination.

  Moreover, you may have the 4th game (highly accurate high base state) which discharges | emits a game ball | bowl to a 2nd game area | region in a 2nd game state, and is performed by making a 1st determination result main subject. Also, the fourth game may be continued until the next big hit occurs. In addition, the fourth game has a lower rate of decrease in the game medium than the first game by increasing the execution frequency of the first success / failure determination than the first game, and the third game is a game with a small hit. By making it possible to obtain a profit, the decrease rate of the game medium may be slower than those of the second game and the fourth game. In addition, since the second game and the fourth game are both in the second game state, the decrease rate of the game medium may be substantially the same.

Further, in the first game, when the result of the first winning / failing determination becomes the first big hit (corresponding to the 4R fourth big winning in the first embodiment), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first winning / failing determination becomes the second big hit ( When the 15R first big hit and the 4R second big hit in the first embodiment are reached, the third game can be executed, and the first determination result is the fifth big hit (corresponding to the 4R third big hit in the first embodiment). The fourth game can be executed,
In the second game, when the result of the first success / failure determination becomes the first big hit (corresponding to the 4R fourth big hit of the first embodiment), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first success / failure determination becomes the second big hit (Example) 1 is equivalent to 15R first jackpot and 4R second jackpot), the third game can be executed, and if the result of the first hit / fail judgment is fifth jackpot (corresponding to 4R third jackpot of Embodiment 1), the fourth game is executed. Making the game viable,
In the third game, when the result of the second win / fail decision is the third big hit (corresponding to the 2R seventh big hit of the first embodiment), the second game can be executed, and the result of the second win / fail decision is the fourth big win (the embodiment) 1) (corresponding to 15R 5th big hit of 1), the third game can be executed, and if the result of the second hit / fail judgment becomes 6th big hit (corresponding to 2R 6th big hit in the first embodiment), the fourth game can be executed. ,
In the fourth game, when the result of the first success / failure determination becomes the first big hit (corresponding to the 4R fourth big hit of the first embodiment), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first success / failure determination becomes the second big hit (Example) 1 is equivalent to 15R first jackpot and 4R second jackpot), the third game can be executed, and if the result of the first hit / fail judgment is fifth jackpot (corresponding to 4R third jackpot of Embodiment 1), the fourth game is executed. The game may be executable.

  The “decreasing speed of the game medium used for the game” is given in the same period from the game medium (launched game ball) used in unit time (for example, 1 minute) or the number of unit shots (for example, 100 shots). The number obtained by subtracting game media (paid prize balls) is calculated as the number of game media (game balls) to be reduced. In the first game, the second game, the third game, and the fourth game, when the game is performed for a predetermined period, the decrease rate of the game medium (game ball, possession ball) held by the player is in descending order of decrease rate. The first game> the second game (the fourth game)> the third game. In the third game, it can be said that the rate of decrease is negative because the longer the game is continued, the more the ball can be increased with a small hit. That is, the first game, the second game, and the fourth game are in a state where the game is played while decreasing the number of balls, while the third game is a state where the game is played while increasing the number of balls.

  In addition, the type of the jackpot (first jackpot type) in the case where the result of the first success / failure determination is a jackpot is different from the jackpot type (second jackpot type) in the case where the result of the second hit / failure determination is a jackpot. It may be many. In addition, as a third game (highly accurate low base state) generated as a result of the second winning / failing determination, when a third game is obtained through a big hit game in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, a prize ball is obtained. It is assumed that the game becomes the third game through the easy hit game. In addition, as the third game (high probability low base state) generated as a result of the first success / failure determination, there is no case of becoming a third game through a big hit game in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball. You may have only when it becomes a 3rd game through the big hit game which is easy to acquire.

  Further, the probability of occurrence of a small hit in the second success / failure determination is set to be higher than the probability of being a big hit in the high probability, and the possibility of occurrence of a small hit in the second determination of success / failure can be increased. More preferably, it is desirable to set the probability of occurrence of small hits in the second determination of success / failure to be ½ or more. In addition, the first entry / failure determination and the second entry / failure determination have the same probability of entry into the high probability state (operation probability of the probability variation function). On the other hand, the first entry / failure determination and the second entry / failure determination may have different rush probabilities for entering the state C (highly accurate low base state). The rush probability may be higher than the first hit / fail judgment. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the game to be launched into the second game area where the third game in which the second determination is made can be executed, and to enhance the game interest.

  Also, in the second win / fail decision, if a big hit is made that does not enter the state C (highly accurate low base state), the big win is the number of winning balls that can be obtained from the big win (big win game) in the second win / fail decision. Is the biggest jackpot (big hit game). The jackpot is a jackpot (big hit game) with the smallest number of winning balls that can be acquired among the big hits (big hit games) in the first and second hit / fail judgments.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that diversifies the game state transition mode and enhances the gaming interest.

(Reference invention 2)
In conventional gaming machines, there is a game that makes a determination as to whether or not a game ball has entered a starting port and displays the symbols in a variable manner based on the result of the determination. In such a gaming machine, when the result of the determination of success / failure is a big hit, the symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, and when the result of the determination of success / failure is out, there is a case where the symbol is removed and stopped and displayed as a symbol. . In addition, there was a gaming machine having a plurality of special symbols and effect symbols as symbols (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-370).

  In addition, the special symbol and the effect symbol of the conventional gaming machine are both variably displayed and stopped based on the determination result. In addition, the special symbol indicates the result of determination of success / failure by displaying the change without displaying the game effect such as reach change after the change display, and the effect symbol is stopped and displayed after performing the game effect such as reach change after the change display. This shows the result of the determination of success / failure. By having a plurality of symbols in this way, display control according to the purpose of each symbol has been made possible.

  However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, it is not easy to confirm the coincidence of both symbols due to the display mode and display position of a plurality of symbols. The present reference invention 2 has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and facilitates confirmation of a plurality of symbols by providing a plurality of symbol display modes, and provides a fair gaming machine.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is
Correct / incorrect determination execution means for executing correct / incorrect determination based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
A first identification information display unit (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) for variably displaying the first identification information (special symbol) on the basis of the determination result,
A second identification information display section (effect design display section 7b) for variably displaying the second identification information (effect design) based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
A third identification information display unit (variation state indicator 49) for variably displaying the third identification information (state symbol, confirmation symbol) based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
A game effect display unit (effect symbol display unit 7b, first display screen 7a) capable of displaying a game effect (reach effect, etc.) executed in accordance with the variable display of the second identification information;
A game machine comprising special game execution means capable of executing a special game when the result of the determination of success or failure is a specific result,
A first display unit (main display device 40) having the first identification information display unit and the third identification information display unit;
And a second display unit (image display device 7, display screen 7a) having the second identification information display unit and the game effect display unit.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first identification information display unit that variably displays the first identification information (special symbol, first special symbol, second special symbol) and the second identification information (effect symbol) are variably displayed. A second identification information display unit for displaying, a third identification information display unit for variably displaying the third identification information (state symbol, confirmation symbol), and a game effect executed in accordance with the variation display of the second identification information. And a game effect display section. In addition, a first display configured to include a first identification information display unit and the third identification information display unit, and a second display configured to include a second identification information display unit and a game effect display unit. And a section.

  Thereby, it is possible to confirm the second identification information and the game effect indicating the result of the go / no-go determination by checking the second display unit, and based on the result of the go / no-go determination by checking the first display unit. The first identification information and the third identification information that are displayed in a variable manner can be confirmed.

The gaming machine of reference invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 2-1,
A gaming machine having a gaming area in which a game ball can flow down and playing a game by flowing the game ball into the game area,
The first display unit is provided inside the game area, and the second display unit is provided outside the game area.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first display unit configured to include the first identification information display unit and the third identification information display unit is disposed outside (outside) the gaming area, and the second identification is performed. A second display unit having an information display unit and a game effect display unit is arranged inside (inside) the game area. Accordingly, the second display unit displays the second identification information indicating the result of the game effect such as the reach effect and the success / failure determination in the game area, thereby confirming the flow of the game ball and the second display unit. The display mode can be confirmed. In addition, the first display unit that can confirm the first identification information and the third identification information is separated from the second display unit and arranged outside the game area, so that the first display unit is not confused by the game effect or the like. It is possible to reliably grasp the display mode of the identification information and the third identification information.

  The first display unit is arranged outside the gaming area (the area outside the rail member that divides the gaming area), and the second display part is inside the gaming area (the area inside the rail member that divides the gaming area). It is good also as what arranges to.

The gaming machine of reference invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 2-2,
The first display unit is composed of an LED, the second display unit is composed of a liquid crystal,
The second display unit is larger than the first display unit.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first display unit is configured by an LED, the second display unit is configured by a liquid crystal, and the second display unit is a larger display unit than the first display unit. As a result, the display mode of the first display unit can be made simple and the display mode of the first identification information and the third identification information can be reliably grasped, and the second display unit is larger than the first display unit. In addition, by being composed of liquid crystal, it is possible to execute various and varied game effects and enhance the game entertainment.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3,
A main control unit having the success / failure determination execution unit;
A sub-control unit that receives and controls a control signal from the main control unit, and
The first identification information display unit constituting the first display unit is controlled by a main control unit, and the third identification information display unit and the second display unit constituting the first display unit are sub-control units. The display is controlled.

  According to such a gaming machine, it has a main control unit and a sub-control unit that receives and controls a control signal from the main control unit. In the first display unit, the first identification information display unit is controlled by the main control unit, and the third identification information display unit is controlled by the sub control unit. The second display unit that displays the game effect and the second identification information is display-controlled by the sub-control unit. That is, the first display unit displays the first identification information that is displayed and controlled by the main control unit, and the third identification information that is controlled and displayed by the sub-control unit. Thus, by confirming the first display unit, it is possible to confirm both the display modes of the identification information (first identification information and third identification information) controlled by the main control unit and the sub control unit. This also makes it possible to easily confirm the consistency of the identification information controlled by the main control unit and the sub control unit.

  The main control unit is a control unit that performs control related to special symbol display control, determination of success / failure, control related to sensor detection, control related to discharge of prize balls, and control related to opening and closing of a variable entrance, and a control unit that controls the game It is. The sub-control unit is a control unit that receives a control signal from the main control unit and performs predetermined control, and performs main control related to game effects such as operation control of the movable member and display control play of the effect display unit. This is a control unit that follows the control unit.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4.
Game information storage means capable of storing predetermined game information;
Power supply means (power supply board 109) for supplying power;
Based on detecting a decrease in power supply voltage, the memory holding means capable of storing the game information stored in the game information storage means for a predetermined period after the power supply is stopped,
Game information recovery means for recovering game information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected based on the game information stored and held by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts power supply;
When the game information recovery means recovers game information, the third identification information display unit recovers earlier than the second display unit, and display control can be executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, when power supply is started, it is provided with game information recovery means for recovering game information when a decrease in power supply voltage is detected based on the game information stored and held by the memory holding means. . When the game information is restored, the third identification information display unit included in the first display unit is restored earlier than the second display unit, thereby enabling display control. The second display unit is composed of a liquid crystal to diversify the game effects and performs a variety of display controls, so that a certain amount of time is required for the game information restoration work. On the other hand, since the 1st display part (3rd identification information display part) comprised simply by LED performs simple display control, it does not require long time for the recovery | restoration work of game information.

  Thereby, even if it is a display part controlled by the same sub control part, a 3rd identification information display part is restored prior to a 2nd display part, and display control can be performed immediately. In addition, this makes it possible to start the game immediately after the power supply starts, in accordance with the return of the main control unit, but the second display unit composed of liquid crystal takes time to recover (the game is still restored after the game starts). Not)). Even in such a situation, it is possible to confirm the display contents to be displayed and controlled by the sub-control unit by confirming the third identification information display unit that has spread quickly and can start display control.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention 2, it is possible to easily confirm a plurality of symbols by using a plurality of symbol display modes, and to provide a fair gaming machine.

(Reference invention 3)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of executing a special game that can give a predetermined gaming profit to a player when the identification information is displayed in a variable manner and the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner. In this type of gaming machine, there is one that performs a notice effect related to the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner by stopping and displaying the pattern as the identification information with a specific appearance (chance eye) (for example, JP, 2004-33671, A).

  However, the notice effect that stops and displays the symbol with a specific outcome is already well known, and there is room for further improvement in order to improve the game entertainment.

  The present reference invention 3 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to improve the game entertainment by realizing an effect in which the player pays attention to the stop display of the identification information.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 is
A game machine capable of executing a special game that can give a predetermined game profit to a player when the identification information is displayed in a variable manner and the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner.
Special stop effect execution means capable of executing a special stop effect for stopping and displaying the identification information in a predetermined special manner;
When the special stop effect is executed, it is provided with a number suggestion effect execution means capable of executing the number suggestion effect suggesting the stop display frequency of the special mode,
The special stop effect execution means is capable of executing stop display of the special mode for the number of times suggested by the number suggestion effect.

  According to such a gaming machine, when a special stop effect in which the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special manner is executed, a number suggestion effect that suggests the number of stop displays in the special manner can be executed. The number of stop display times of the special mode indicated by the production is executable. Thereby, when the special stop effect is executed, it becomes possible to make the player pay attention to the number of times that the special stop effect and the identification information are stopped and displayed in a special manner, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment. Become.

The gaming machine of reference invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 3-1 described above.
The number suggestion effect is a countdown effect that counts down the number of stop displays in the special mode every time the identification information is stopped and displayed in the special mode.

  According to such a gaming machine, every time the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode, the number of stop display times of the special mode in the special stop effect (remaining stop) Number of impressions). Thereby, it becomes possible to make a player pay attention to the number of times that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special manner in the special stop effect.

The gaming machine of reference invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 3-1 or 3-2 described above.
The special mode includes a plurality of special modes,
Depending on the type of the special mode when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode, it is possible to suggest the feasibility of the special game,
When the special mode stop display is executed a plurality of times, as the number of stop display times of the special mode in the meantime increases, the type of the special mode that is stopped and displayed indicates that the possibility of execution is relatively high It is characterized by being able to change.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the special mode stop display is executed a plurality of times in the special stop effect, the execution possibility of the special game suggested by the special mode that is stopped and displayed during that time is It can become higher as the number of stop displays increases. Thereby, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the execution of the special game by making the player pay attention to the number of times the identification information is stopped and displayed in the special mode and the type of the special mode to be stopped and displayed.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-3 described above,
A specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect as to whether or not the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode after execution of the stop display of the special mode of the number of times suggested by the number-of-times suggesting effect. It is a feature.

  According to such a gaming machine, after the stop display of the number of special modes suggested by the number suggestion effect is executed, the specific effect relating to whether or not the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode can be executed. ing. Thereby, in addition to the special stop effect, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the specific effect after the special stop effect is executed, and to further improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-4 described above.
Acquisition information storage means capable of storing acquisition information acquired based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
Fluctuation display means for performing fluctuation display of the identification information based on the acquired information,
Based on the fact that specific acquisition information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, the special stop effect and the number suggestion effect can be executed,
After the execution of the stop display of the special mode for the number of times suggested by the number suggestion effect, the identification information is variably displayed based on the specific acquired information.

  According to such a gaming machine, the special stop effect and the number suggestion effect can be executed when specific acquisition information is stored as the acquisition information that triggers the variation display of the identification information. After the stop display of the special mode of the number of times suggested by is performed, the variation display of the identification information based on the specific acquired information is performed. Thereby, it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment interest after the specific acquisition information is stored until the variable display of the identification information based on the specific acquisition information is performed.

  According to the present invention 3 described above, it is possible to achieve an effect that makes the player pay attention to the stop display of the identification information, and to improve the gaming interest.

(Reference invention 4)
The reference invention 4 for solving the same problem as the above-described reference invention 3 has the following characteristic configuration.

That is, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is
A game machine capable of executing a special game that can give a predetermined game profit to a player when the identification information is displayed in a variable manner and the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner.
State control means capable of controlling any of a plurality of gaming states;
Stop display means capable of stopping and displaying the identification information in a predetermined special manner,
It is possible to suggest the feasibility of the special game by stopping the identification information in a special manner,
The plurality of gaming states include at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state,
The configuration of the special mode is different between when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode in the first gaming state and when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode in the second gaming state. It is what.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to suggest the possibility of executing a special game (in other words, the possibility that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner) by stopping and displaying the identification information in a special manner. It has become. The configuration of the special mode is different between the case where the identification information is stopped and displayed in the special mode in the first gaming state and the case where the identification information is stopped and displayed in the special mode in the second gaming state. It has become a thing. This makes it possible to vary the special aspect of the identification information depending on the gaming state, and to make the player pay attention to the special aspect corresponding to the gaming state, and thus to improve the gaming interest.

The gaming machine of reference invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 4-1 described above.
The identification information is composed of a plurality of symbols,
The special mode when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode in the first gaming state is a mode in which a plurality of symbols are all in the same category,
The special mode when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode in the second gaming state is a mode in which a plurality of symbols become a predetermined symbol combination.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode in the first gaming state, the special mode is a mode in which a plurality of symbols constituting the identification information are all in the same class. In the second gaming state, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode, the special mode is a mode in which a plurality of symbols constituting the identification information become a predetermined symbol combination. Thereby, it becomes possible to make a player pay attention to the difference between the special mode that can be stopped and displayed in the first gaming state and the special mode that can be stopped and displayed in the second gaming state.

The gaming machine of reference invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 4-2 described above.
In the first game state, suggesting the feasibility of the special game by the classification of the symbols constituting the special mode when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode,
In the second gaming state, the possibility of executing the special game is suggested by the type of one symbol included in the symbol combination constituting the special mode when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode. It is what.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the special mode in the first gaming state, the possibility of executing the special game is suggested by the classification of the symbols constituting the special mode. ing. Further, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode in the second gaming state, the possibility of executing a special game is suggested by the type of one symbol included in the symbol combination constituting the special mode. ing. Thereby, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the special mode in the first gaming state, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the special mode in the second gaming state, the possibility of executing the special game is suggested. It becomes possible to make a player pay attention to each special aspect by changing the way of.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 4-1 to 4-3 described above,
An effect effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect effect when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special manner;
The case where the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special manner in the first gaming state and the case where the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special manner in the second gaming state. It is a feature.

  According to such a gaming machine, a predetermined effect effect can be executed when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode, and the effect effect mode can be performed in the first game state and the second game state. Are different. Thereby, in addition to the special mode of the identification information, the mode of the effect effect can be changed depending on the game state, and it becomes possible to make the player easily pay attention to the stop display when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the special mode. .

  According to the fourth aspect of the present invention described above, it is possible to achieve an effect that makes the player pay attention to the stop display of the identification information, and to improve the gaming interest.

(Reference invention 5)
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of executing a special game capable of giving a predetermined game profit to a player based on a variable display of identification information and a display result of the variable display being a specific display result. Yes. In this type of gaming machine, various effects for enhancing the player's expectation are performed while the identification information is variably displayed (see, for example, JP-A-2009-95470).

  However, although the production contents (for example, motifs and characters that appear) differ depending on the model, the production techniques (for example, development and patterns of production) are not so different. There is room for further improvement in order to improve the game entertainment interest.

  The present invention 5 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its object is to realize a highly attractive performance and improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing a special game capable of giving a predetermined game profit to a player based on the fact that the identification information is displayed in a variable manner and the display result of the variable display is a specific display result.
Display means capable of displaying images;
Selection accepting means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect information so that the player can select and accepting the selection of effect information;
Production execution means capable of executing a specific production during the variation display of the identification information,
The effect executing means, when executing the specific effect, displays an effect image corresponding to the type of effect information received by the selection receiving means on the display means, and executes the specific effect. It is what.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to display a plurality of types of effect information so that the player can select them, and accept selection of effect information from them. Then, when a specific effect is executed during the variation display of the identification information executed after the selection of the effect information is received, in the specific effect, an effect image corresponding to the type of the received effect information is displayed. An effect is displayed that reflects the result of selection by the player. Thereby, it becomes possible to enhance the interest of the specific effect when the specific effect is executed during the variation display of the identification information, and to improve the game entertainment interest.

  The production information refers to information indicating various elements (production elements) constituting the production such as characters and items on the production, background, and sound effects.

The gaming machine of reference invention 5-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 5-1, which is described above.
When the specific effect is executed, the effect executing means outputs a music corresponding to the type of effect information received by the selection receiving means from a predetermined output unit, and executes the specific effect. It is what.

  According to such a gaming machine, when a specific effect is executed during the variation display of the identification information that is executed after the selection of the effect information is received, in the specific effect, In addition to displaying the effect image corresponding to the type, the music corresponding to the type is output. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the preference of the specific effect when the specific effect is executed during the variable display of the identification information.

The gaming machine of reference invention 5-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 5-1 or 5-2 described above.
The variation display of the identification information is executed based on a variation pattern selected from a plurality of predetermined variation patterns,
The plurality of variation patterns include at least a first variation pattern and a second variation pattern,
The second variation pattern is more likely to be selected when the display result of the variation display is the specific display result than the first variation pattern,
The effect execution means is capable of executing the specific effect by a variation display of the identification information based on the second variation pattern.

  According to such a gaming machine, based on a configuration in which a variation display of identification information is executed based on a variation pattern selected from a plurality of variation patterns including the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern, A specific effect can be executed in the variation display of the identification information based on the second variation pattern that is likely to be selected when the display result of the variation display is the specific display result. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to attract the player's attention to a specific effect, as a specific effect that can reflect the result of selection by the player as an effect that increases the expectation for the derivation of the specific display result. Become.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 5-1 to 5-3 described above,
The display means includes a first display screen, and a second display screen having a screen size smaller than the first display screen,
The selection receiving means can display the plurality of types of effect information on the second display screen and accept selection of effect information,
The effect executing means is capable of executing the specific effect by displaying an effect image corresponding to the type of effect information received by the selection receiving means on the first display screen. .

  According to such a gaming machine, the first display screen and the second display screen having a screen size smaller than the first display screen are included, and the second display screen having a relatively small screen size is the second display screen. 2 Selection of effect information is received, and a specific effect reflecting the result of the selection (accepted effect information) is executed on the first display screen having a relatively large screen size. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the production effect when the specific production is executed stand out.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 5-1 to 5-4 described above,
Corresponding image display means capable of displaying a corresponding image corresponding to the effect information received by the selection receiving means on a predetermined display unit is provided.

  According to such a gaming machine, a plurality of types of effect information are displayed so as to be selectable by the player, and when selection of effect information is accepted from among them, a corresponding image corresponding to the accepted effect information is predetermined. Displayed on the display. Accordingly, it is possible to confirm which effect information is received (selected) through the corresponding image displayed on the display unit.

  According to the present reference invention 5 described above, it is possible to achieve a highly interesting performance and improve the game entertainment.

(Reference invention 6)
Conventionally, when a game ball enters the starting port, a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. As a result of the variable display, if the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the big hit game is executed and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine in which a small hit game is executed is known. The small hit game is a game in which the number of game balls that can be acquired is smaller than the big hit game, and a game that realizes a game property that uses this small hit game to increase the number of possessed balls has been proposed (for example, (See JP-A-2006-202405).

  However, there is still room for improvement with regard to gaming machines having a gaming property that uses a small hit game to increase the number of balls, in order to improve the gaming interest.

  The present invention 6 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to improve the gaming interest of a gaming machine having such a gaming property.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 is
Correct / incorrect determination execution means capable of executing correct / incorrect determination;
First special game execution means capable of executing a first special game based on the result of the determination of success or failure being a first specific result;
A second special game execution means capable of executing a second special game based on the result of the determination of success or failure being a second specific result;
Production execution means capable of performing the production,
The first special game is a game in which a predetermined amount of game profit can be given to the player,
The second special game is a game that can give a player a smaller amount of game profit than the first special game,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect when the second special game is continuously executed a plurality of times.

  According to such a gaming machine, when a second special game that can give a player a smaller amount of game profit than the first special game is continuously executed a plurality of times, a predetermined effect can be executed. It becomes. Thereby, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the continuous execution of the second special game a plurality of times through the predetermined effect, and as a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. The predetermined effect can be constituted by an effect appealing to the player's vision, an effect appealing to the player's hearing, an effect combining them, or the like.

The gaming machine of reference invention 6-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 6-1 described above.
When the second special game is continuously executed a plurality of times, the effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect for each second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the second special game is continuously executed a plurality of times, the predetermined effect can be executed each time the second special game is executed. As a result, the number of executions (number of appearances) of the predetermined effect increases, and it is possible to enhance the effect and interest by executing the second special game continuously a plurality of times.

The gaming machine of reference invention 6-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 6-1 or 6-2 described above,
The effect execution means can change the effect mode of the predetermined effect by increasing the number of times of execution of the second special game that is continuously executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, when a predetermined effect is executed at the time of continuous execution of the second special game a plurality of times, the effect mode of the predetermined effect changes as the number of times of execution of the second special game increases. It will be possible. Thereby, it becomes possible to improve the preference of a predetermined effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 6-1 to 6-3 described above,
Provided with a game state control means capable of controlling the game state,
The gaming state control means may control a gaming state to a non-specific gaming state and a specific gaming state.
The specific game state is a game state in which the execution frequency of the second special game is higher than the non-specific game state,
The effect execution means can execute the predetermined effect in the specific gaming state.
It is characterized by this.

  According to such a gaming machine, there are a case where the gaming state of the gaming machine is controlled to a non-specific gaming state and a case where the gaming state is controlled to a specific gaming state. The execution frequency of the second special game is higher than in the case of being controlled to the non-specific game state. For this reason, in the specific game state, the second special game is likely to be continuously executed a plurality of times. By making it possible to execute a predetermined effect in such a specific game state, it becomes easier to execute the predetermined effect in the specific game state, and it is possible to increase the chance that the player contacts the predetermined effect. This makes it possible to enhance the interest of the specific game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 6-1 to 6-4 described above.
An acquisition information storage means capable of storing acquisition information acquired based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
The success / failure determination execution means can execute the determination of the success / failure based on the acquired information.
When it is determined in the determination as to whether the acquired information is predetermined first information, the determination result is the first specific result,
When the second special game is continuously executed a plurality of times, the effect executing means is configured to store the predetermined information when the acquired information determined to be the first information is stored in the acquired information storage means. It is characterized by the fact that the performance may not be executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the acquisition information storage unit capable of storing the acquisition information acquired based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is provided, and the determination of validity is performed based on the acquisition information. Then, when it is determined that the acquired information is the predetermined first information in the determination of success / failure, the result of the determination of success / failure becomes the first specific result, and based on this, the first special game can be executed. Under these circumstances, when the second special game is continuously executed a plurality of times, acquisition information (acquisition information that triggers the execution of the first special game) that is determined to be the first information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit. If it is, the predetermined effect may not be executed. For this reason, when the predetermined effect is not executed even though the second special game is continuously executed a plurality of times, acquisition information that triggers the execution of the first special game can be stored accordingly. It is possible to indicate to the player that there is a possibility that the first special game is feasible. Thereby, when the second special game is continuously executed a plurality of times, it becomes possible to suggest the subsequent game development by not executing the predetermined effect, and it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the predetermined effect is executed. Become.

  According to the reference invention 6 described above, it is possible to improve the gaming interest.

(Reference invention 7)
Conventionally, a variation display of identification information is performed based on acquired information acquired by entering a game ball into a start opening, and a predetermined display result is given to the player based on the display result of the variation display being a specific display result. There is known a gaming machine that can execute a special game that can give the gaming profit. In this type of gaming machine, what stores the acquired information acquired by entering the game ball at the start opening as a hold and performs a notice effect (so-called “hold pre-read effect”) based on the result of prior determination of the hold. It is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-236974).

  However, the notice effect as described above is already well known, and there is room for further improvement in order to improve the game entertainment by the effect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to realize a notice effect of a novel aspect and improve amusement interest.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 is
Based on the acquired information acquired by entering the game ball into the starting port, the variation display of the identification information is performed, and based on the display result of the variation display being the specific display result, a predetermined game is given to the player. A gaming machine that can execute a special game that can give profits,
A display screen capable of displaying a predetermined display;
Acquisition information storage means capable of storing the acquisition information,
The display screen is provided with at least a first display unit and a second display unit,
In the first display unit, a storage display indicating that the acquired information is stored can be displayed in correspondence with the storage number,
The second display unit is capable of displaying a notice display relating to the acquired information in correspondence with the stored display being displayed on the first display unit.

  According to such a gaming machine, the display screen capable of displaying the predetermined display can display the first display unit capable of displaying the storage display indicating that the acquired information is stored, and the notice display regarding the acquired information. A second display is provided. Of the two display units, the first display unit can display a stored display corresponding to the number of stored pieces of acquired information (the number of stored items), and the second display unit includes the first display unit. A notice display can be displayed corresponding to the memory display being displayed. As a result, it is possible to realize a notice display of a new aspect that easily attracts the player's attention, and to improve the gaming interest.

The gaming machine of reference invention 7-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 7-1 described above.
The first display unit can display a variable storage display corresponding to the acquired information that triggered the variable display during the variable display of the identification information.
The second display unit is capable of displaying a notice display related to the acquired information that triggered the variable display in correspondence with the variable storage display being displayed on the first display unit. To do.

  According to such a gaming machine, in addition to the storage display indicating that the acquisition information is stored, the first display unit corresponds to the acquisition information that triggered the currently displayed change display (the change). The variable memory display can be displayed, and the second display unit can display the advance notice regarding the acquired information that triggered the change corresponding to the variable memory display being displayed on the first display unit. It is said that. Thereby, it is possible to improve the gaming interest by paying attention to the player also in the notice display corresponding to the currently displayed variation display (variation storage display).

The gaming machine of reference invention 7-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 7-1 or 7-2 described above,
The second display unit is characterized in that a predetermined effect display can be displayed when the notice display is not displayed.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the notice display is not displayed on the second display unit, a predetermined effect display can be displayed on the second display unit. Thereby, even when the notice display is not displayed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect display displayed on the second display unit and improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 7-1 to 7-3 described above.
The display screen is provided with a third display unit capable of displaying a symbol as the identification information,
The second display unit is larger than the third display unit.

  According to such a gaming machine, on the display screen, in addition to the first display unit and the second display unit described above, the third display unit capable of displaying a symbol as the identification information is provided. The second display unit is larger than the display unit. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the display content of the second display portion stand out, and it is possible to make the player easily pay attention to the second display portion.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 7-1 to 7-4 described above.
Gaming state control means capable of controlling the gaming state;
A variable start opening that can change the ease of entering a game ball as the start opening,
Display control means capable of controlling display of the display screen,
The gaming state control means is capable of controlling the gaming state to a high frequency state where the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable start port is higher than normal.
The display control means sets the first display unit and the second display unit on the display screen when the gaming state is controlled to the high frequency state.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the gaming state is controlled to a high-frequency state where the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable start port is higher than usual, the first display unit and the second display unit described above Is set on the display screen. Since the frequency of entering game balls into the variable start opening is high in the high frequency state, the screen configuration provided with the first display unit and the second display unit is stored in the first display unit by adopting the high frequency state. Opportunities for displaying the display (opportunities for storing the acquired information) increase, and accordingly, the chances for displaying the notice display on the second display unit also increase. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the interest of a high frequency state.

  According to the present invention 7 described above, it is possible to improve the gaming interest.

  Two or more arbitrary inventions of the above-described reference inventions 1 to 7 may be combined.

  1 Pachinko machine, 2 game board, 3 game area, 3A left game area (first area), 3B right game area (second area), 7 image display device, 7a display screen, 7b effect symbol display area (3rd) Display section), 8 effect designs, 9a first effect hold (memory display), 9b second effect hold (memory display), 9c first effect hold display area (first display section), 9e the variable hold display area (first display) 1 display part), 9f The effect on hold (variable memory display), 9h Notice display area (second display part), 20 1st start port, 21 2nd start port, 26 3rd start port, 28 gate, 30 1st Grand prize opening, 35 Second big prize opening, 41a First special symbol display (first special symbol display unit), 41b Second special symbol display (second special symbol display unit), 71 Second image display device, 71a display screen, 72 third image display device, 72a display screen, 80 main control board (main control part), 90 sub control board (sub control part), 100 image control board (image control part).

Claims (5)

Correct / incorrect determination execution means capable of executing correct / incorrect determination;
First special game execution means capable of executing a first special game based on the result of the determination of success or failure being a first specific result;
A second special game execution means capable of executing a second special game based on the result of the determination of success or failure being a second specific result;
Production execution means capable of performing the production,
The first special game is a game in which a predetermined amount of game profit can be given to the player,
The second special game is a game that can give a player a smaller amount of game profit than the first special game,
The effect execution means can execute a predetermined effect when the second special game is continuously executed a plurality of times. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein when the second special game is continuously executed a plurality of times, the effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect for each second special game. . The game according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the effect execution means can change the effect mode of the predetermined effect by increasing the number of times of execution of the second special game that is continuously executed. Machine. Provided with a game state control means capable of controlling the game state,
The gaming state control means may control a gaming state to a non-specific gaming state and a specific gaming state.
The specific game state is a game state in which the execution frequency of the second special game is higher than the non-specific game state,
The effect execution means can execute the predetermined effect in the specific gaming state.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by that. An acquisition information storage means capable of storing acquisition information acquired based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
The success / failure determination execution means can execute the determination of the success / failure based on the acquired information.
When it is determined in the determination as to whether the acquired information is predetermined first information, the determination result is the first specific result,
When the second special game is continuously executed a plurality of times, the effect executing means is configured to store the predetermined information when the acquired information determined to be the first information is stored in the acquired information storage means. The game machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the performance may not be executed.

Images